NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER
User Manual
SRN-473S/873S/1673S
Network Video Recorder
User Manual
Copyright
©2015 Samsung Techwin Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
Trademark
is the registered logo of Samsung Techwin Co., Ltd.
The name of this product is the registered trademark of Samsung Techwin Co., Ltd.
Other trademarks mentioned in this manual are the registered trademark of their respective company.
Restriction
Samsung Techwin Co., Ltd shall reserve the copyright of this document. Under no circumstances, this document shall be reproduced,
distributed or changed, partially or wholly, without formal authorization of Samsung Techwin.
Disclaimer
Samsung Techwin makes the best to verify the integrity and correctness of the contents in this document, but no formal guarantee shall be
provided. Use of this document and the subsequent results shall be entirely on the user’s own responsibility. Samsung Techwin reserves the
right to change the contents of this document without prior notice.
™™Design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
™™The initial administrator ID is “admin” and the password should be set when logging in for the first time.
Set password for your wireless network if you use the product with a wireless router. Being not protected with password or
using the default wireless router password may expose your video data to potential threat.
Please change your password every three months to safely protect personal information and to prevent the damage of the
information theft.
Please, take note that it’s a user’s responsibility for the security and any other problems caused by mismanaging a password.
overview
Important Safety Instructions
Read these operating instructions carefully before using the unit.
Follow all the safety instructions listed below.
Keep these operating instructions handy for future reference.
● overview
1) Read these instructions.
2) Keep these instructions.
3) Heed all warnings.
4) Follow all instructions.
5) Do not use this apparatus near water.
6) Clean only with dry cloth.
7) Do not block any ventilation openings, Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding- type plug. A polarized plug has two blades
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The
wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. if the provided plug does not fit into your outlet,
consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles,
and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer,
or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/
apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of
time.
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the
apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is
damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been
exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
Standards Approvals
equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the
MM `` This
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area
is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
English _3
overview
Before Start
This manual provides operational information necessary for using the product and contains a description about each
component part and its function as well as menu or network settings.
You have to keep in mind the following notices :
•• SAMSUNG retains the copyright on this manual.
•• This manual cannot be copied without SAMSUNG's prior written approval.
•• We are not liable for any or all losses to the product incurred by your use of non-standard product or violation of
instructions mentioned in this manual.
•• Prior to opening the case, please consult a qualified technician first. Whenever this is needed power must be
removed from the unit.
•• Before adding a hard disk drive or external storage (USB memory, USB HDD, etc), check if it is compliant with this
product. For the compatibility list, contact the retailer.
Warning
Battery
It is essential that when changing the battery in the unit, the replacement battery must be of the same type
otherwise there may be a possibility of an explosion.
The following are the specifications of the battery you are using now.
•• Normal voltage : 3V
•• Normal capacity : 65mAh
•• Continuous standard load : 0.2mA
•• Operating temperature : - 20°C ~ +60°C
(-4°F ~ +140°F)
CALIFORNIA USA ONLY
This Perchlorate warning applies only to primary CR (Manganese Dioxide)
Lithium coin cells in the product sold or distributed ONLY in California USA.
"Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply,
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate."
•• A secondary battery (Rechargeable)
Caution
•• Connect the power cord into a grounded outlet.
•• The Mains plug is used as a disconnect device and shall stay readily operable at any time.
•• Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.
•• Risk of Explosion if Battery is replaced by an Incorrect Type. Dispose of Used Batteries According to the
Instructions.
System Shutdown
Turning off the power while the product is in operation, or undertaking improper actions may cause damage or
malfunction to the hard drive or the product.
To safely turn off the power, check <OK> in the system termination pop up window and then remove the power
chord.
You may want to install a UPS system for safe operation in order to prevent damage caused by an unexpected
power stoppage. (Any questions concerning UPS, consult your UPS retailer.)
JJ `` If powered off abnormally, restarting may take more time for restoring data from hard disk drive for proper operation.
4_ overview
Operating Temperature
Ethernet Port
This equipment is in door use and all the communication wirings are limited to inside of the building.
Security Precautions
The initial administrator ID is “admin” and the password should be set when logging in for the first time.
Set password for your wireless network if you use the product with a wireless router. Being not protected with
password or using the default wireless router password may expose your video data to potential threat.
Please change your password every three months to safely protect personal information and to prevent the
damage of the information theft.
Please, take note that it’s a user’s responsibility for the security and any other problems caused by
mismanaging a password.
English _5
● overview
The guaranteed operating temperature range of this product is 0°C ~ 40°C (32°F ~ 104°F).
This product may not work properly if you run right after a long period of storage at a temperature below the
guaranteed one.
Prior to using a device that has been stored for a long period in low temperatures, allow the product to stand at
room temperature for a period.
Especially for the built-in HDD in the product, its guaranteed temperature range is 5°C ~ 55°C (41°F ~ 131°F).
Likewise, the hard drive may not work at a temperature below the guaranteed one.
overview
Contents
overview
3
installation
17
connecting with other device
26
live
34
menu setup
59
6_ overview
3 Important Safety Instructions
4 Before Start
6Contents
8Features
12 Part Names and Functions (Front)
13 Part Names and Functions (Rear)
15 Remote Control
17 Checking the Installation Environment
18 Rack Installation
19 HDD Addition
26
27
28
31
Connecting to an External Device
Connecting the USB
Connecting the Alarm Input/Output
Connecting the Network
34 Getting Started
38 Live Screen Configuration
45 Live Screen Mode
49Zoom
50 PoE Status
51Layout
52 Audio ON/OFF
52Freeze
53 Event Monitoring
54Maintain the Screen Ratio
55Display Text
56 PTZ Control
59
70
89
93
97
System Setup
Setting the Device
Setting the Recording
Setting the Event
Network Configuration
search & play
109
115
live viewer
118
search viewer
128
setup viewer
133
backup viewer
151
appendix
153
● overview
starting web viewer
109Search
113Playback
115 What is Web Viewer?
116 Connecting Web Viewer
118 Live Viewer
120 Live Screen Configuration
126 Controlling a Connected Network Camera
128 Search Viewer
133 Setup Viewer
151 SEC Backup Viewer
153 Product Specification
159 Product Overview
162 Default Setting
166Troubleshooting
170 Open Source License Report on the Product
English _7
overview
Features
The product records video and audio from network cameras to a hard disk, and enables playback from the hard disk.
It also provides remote monitoring environment for video and audio over the network using a remote computer.
•• User-friendly UI
•• VGA, 4CIF, record in a max of 4096x2160 (8M pixel) supported
•• Record and play video
•• Record and play audio
•• Supports ONVIF Profile S standard and RTP / RTSP protocols
•• Full HD video output via HDMI
•• Display the HDD operation status by HDD SMART
•• HDD overwrite enabled
•• Backup using USB 2.0 protocols and external HDD
•• Simultaneous playback of 4, 8, or 16 channels
•• Various Search Modes (Search by Time, Event, Text, Backup)
•• Various Recording Modes (Normal, Event, Scheduled Recording)
•• Alarm Input / Output
•• Remote Monitoring function by Windows Network Viewer
•• Live monitoring of the network camera
•• Installation Wizard Function (Quick Setup)
8_ overview
Package Contents
Please unwrap the product, and place the product on a flat place or in the place to be installed.
Please check the following contents are included in addition to the main unit.
● overview
SRN-473S
NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER
POWER ALARM
REC
NVR
Mouse
Power Cable
Power Adaptor
Remote Control /
Remote Control Battery (AAA)
Network Viewer Software /
User Manual CD
User Manual or Quick Manual
Terminal block
MM `` Two additional screws are provided to install an HDD for models that come without an HDD installed.
English _9
overview
SRN-873S
REC
DV25
HDD
ALARM NETWORK BACKUP
POWER
NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER SRN-475S
NVR
Mouse
Power Cable
Network Viewer Software /
User Manual CD
Remote Control /
Remote Control Battery (AAA)
User Manual or Quick Manual
Bracket rack
Bracket mounting screws
Terminal block
10_ overview
SRN-1673S
NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER
USB
● overview
NVR
Mouse
Power Cable
Network Viewer Software /
User Manual CD
Remote Control /
Remote Control Battery (AAA)
User Manual or Quick Manual
Bracket rack
Bracket mounting screws
Terminal block
English _11
overview
Part Names and Functions (Front)
SRN-473S
a
NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER
POWER ALARM
b
REC
c
SRN-873S
a
REC
DV25
HDD
ALARM NETWORK BACKUP
POWER
NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER SRN-475S
c
SRN-1673S
b
a
NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER
USB
b
Part Names
Functions
REC : Lights on when recording is in progress.
HDD : Displays the normal access to HDD.
LED turns on when accessing the hard disk.
a
LED Indicator
ALARM : Lights on when an event occurs.
NETWORK : Displays both network connection and data transfer status.
BACKUP : Displays when Backup is in progress.
b
c
USB
Remote Reception
System
12_ overview
POWER : Shows the power ON/OFF status.
Connects the USB devices.
Receive the signal from the remote control.
Part Names and Functions (Rear)
SRN-473S
b
1
3
2
4
AUDIO
OUT
HDMI
VGA OUT
VIEWER
● overview
a
DC 54V
PoE
CAMERA
h gf
e dc
SRN-873S
a
eSATA
VIEWER
CONSOLE
VGA OUT
HDMI
ALARM
IN
AUDIO
OUT
1 2 3 4 NO
1
2
3
4
PoE
CAMERA
5
6
AC 100
240~IN
ALARM
OUT
1
2
COM
NC NO
COM
3
NO
COM
G
7
8
b
d j e
gf h
ci
SRN-1673S
a
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
USB
PoE
ALARM
RESET
ALARM IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
VIEWER
CONSOLE
eSATA
HDMI
VGA OUT
G
AUDIO OUT
CAMERA
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
NO NC NO NO NO G
COM COM COM COM
SWITCH
1
b
Part Names
ALARM OUT
A terminal to connect a separate ground cable.
b
PoE (CAMERA)
Power supply port to connect to a camera.
c
Power
Terminal to connect power to.
SWITCH
4
Functions
Ground connection
d
3
d k jg e f h c i
a
VIEWER
2
`` Make sure to add a ground cable in order to use the equipment safely.
Port used to send video to the web viewer.
Port connected to a camera, and you can access the camera's web viewer to setup detailed
camera settings.
English _13
overview
Part Names
Functions
e
VGA OUT
VGA Video Signal Output Port.
f
AUDIO OUT
Audio Signal Output Port (RCA jack).
g
HDMI
HDMI connector port.
h
ALARM
-- ALARM IN : Alarm input ports.
SRN-473S : 1~2 CH
SRN-873S : 1~4 CH
SRN-1673S : 1~8 CH
-- ALARM OUT : Alarm output ports.
SRN-473S : 1CH
SRN-873S : 1~3 CH
SRN-1673S : 1~4 CH
-- ALARM RESET : Alarm Reset port.
`` Applicable only to the SRN-1673S model.
i
Power Switch
Power on/off switch.
j
eSATA
Ports used for external storage device connections.
k
USB
Connects the USB devices.
MM `` [CONSOLE] is designed for the service repair purpose only.
14_ overview
Remote Control
REC
● overview
POWER
Displays the Exit pop up screen.
Starts or ends the live recording.
NUMBER [0~+10]
Used as the numeric input keys, or displays a single
channel.
PTZ
Displays or ends PTZ.
T/W
Zooms in or out.
SEARCH
Displays the search menu.
ID
Sets the ID of the system.
Select 2 digits from 0 ~ 9 while pressing the ID Key.
SCROLL ,.
Moves the menu scroll.
VIEW
Runs the View function in the PTZ mode.
Changes the screen mode.
MODE
BACKUP
MENU
RETURN
Display the live screen menu.
PRESET
Displays the Preset Setup.
FREEZE
Freezes the screen temporarily.
ZOOM
Runs the digital zoom (x2) function.
Skip Backward (by unit time),
Slow Rewind, Slow Forward,
Skip Forward (by unit time)
Displays the Backup Menu.
Returns to the previous screen.
Up/Down/Left/Right($%_ +)/ENTER
Moves the cursor up/down/left/right, and runs the
Select Menu.
REC LOCK
Selects the recording lock function.
AUDIO
Turns Audio on/off.
ALARM
Cancels the Alarm.
Move Frame
While paused, moves to the previous/next frame.
FR, STOP, PLAY/PAUSE, FF
English _15
overview
Using the Numeric buttons
CHANNEL 1–9
CHANNEL 10
CHANNEL 11–16
Press each button between 1 to 9.
Press the [+10] button first, then press the 0 button again within 3 seconds.
Press the [+10] button first, then press any number between 1 to 6 within 3 seconds.
Changing the Remote Control ID
Remote control’s ID and NVR’s ID should be matched for proper operation.
1. Press the [ID] button of the remote control and check the ID displayed on the NVR screen.
The factory default ID of the remote control is 00.
2. Enter 2 digits of your selection in order, while pressing the [ID] button of the remote control.
3. When ID input is done, press the [ID] button of the remote control again to check the setting.
you want to change the remote control ID to 08: Press 0 and 8 in order while the [ID] button of the remote control is
MM `` Ifpressed.
For changing the ID of remote device, refer to “Remote Devices”. (Page 85)
16_ overview
installation
Please take note of the followings before using this product.
● installation
•• Do not use the product outdoor.
•• Do not spill water or liquid in the connection part of the product.
•• Do not impose the system to excessive shock or force.
•• Do not pull out the power plug forcefully.
•• Do not disassemble the product on your own.
•• Do not exceed the rated input/output range.
•• Use a certified power cord only.
•• For the product with an input ground, use a grounded power plug.
Checking the Installation Environment
This product is a top-notch security device that is equipped
with a high-capacity HDD and other key circuit boards.
Note that an excessive internal temperature of the product may
cause a system failure or a shortened product life (see the right
figure). Keep in mind the following instructions before installing
the product.
Temperature
Unit: ºC
One Year: 24HR X 365 DAY =8,760 HR
Life (Unit: HOURS)
[Figure 1]
When mounting the product on a rack, comply with the following instructions.
1. Please ensure that the rack inside is not sealed.
2. Please ensure the air is circulated through the inlet/outlet as shown in the picture.
3. If you pile up the prudcts or other rack-mount devices as shown in figure 2, secure room for
ventilation or install a vent.
4. For natural air convection, place the inlet at the bottom of the rack and the outlet on top.
5. It is strongly recommended that a fan motor is installed at the inlet and the outlet for air
circulation. (Please fit a filter at the inlet to screen dust or foreign substances.)
6. Please maintain the temperature inside the rack or surrounding areas between 0°C ~ 40°C
(32°F ~ 104°F) as shown in the figure 1.
Rack Mount Instructions - The following or similar rack-mount instructions are included with
the installation instructions :
A)Elevated Operating Ambient - If installed in a closed or multi-unit rack assembly, the
operating ambient temperature of the rack environment may be greater than room
ambient. Therefore, consideration should be given to installing the equipment in an
[Figure 2]
environment compatible with the maximum ambient temperature (Tma) specified by the
manufacturer.
B)Reduced Air Flow - Installation of the equipment in a rack should be such that the amount of air flow required
for safe operation of the equipment is not compromised.
C)Mechanical Loading - Mounting of the equipment in the rack should be such that a hazardous condition is
not achieved due to uneven mechanical loading.
D)Circuit Overloading - Consideration should be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply circuit
and the effect that overloading of the circuits might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring.
Appropriate consideration of equipment nameplate ratings should be used when addressing this concern.
E)Reliable Earthing - Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment should be maintained. Particular attention should
be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit (e.g. use of power strips).
English _17
installation
Rack Installation
Install the Bracket-Rack as shown in the figure, and then fasten the
screws on both sides (2 screws on each side).
`` Fix the screws not to be loosened by vibrations.
Cautions when Installing in the Rack
To install multiple NVRs in the rack, make sure to separate the FOOT at the bottom of each NVR.
1. There are four FOOTs at the bottom of a NVR.
Press the projected parts at both-ends of each “FOOT” and
turn it counterclockwise.
2. “FOOT” is separated from the main body when it is turned
to the end of fastening groove.
<Separation>
18_ installation
<Installation>
HDD Addition
Make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet to prevent possible electric shock, injury or product damage.
Please consult your provider for further information on HDD installation since improper installation or settings may
damage the product.
● installation
`` Number of HDDs supported : SRN-473S : max 1
SRN-873S : max 2
SRN-1673S : max 4 can be added.
`` Make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before proceeding with the installation.
for data loss (HDD care)
JJ `` Cautions
Please pay attention so that the data inside the HDD is not damaged.
Before adding a HDD, please check the compatibility with this product.
HDD is vulnerable to malfunction due to its sensitive nature especially against shock when operating.
Please ensure that the HDD is free from such shock.
We are not liable for any damage to the HDD incurred by user's carelessness or miss use.
`` Cases might cause damage to HDD or recorded data
To minimize the risk of data loss from a damaged HDD, please backup data as often as possible.
If exposed to shock when disassembling or installing, data stored in the hard disk may be damaged.
A sudden power failure or turning off the product while in HDD operation may damage the hard disk drive.
HDD or files stored inside may be damaged if the main body is moved or impacted during the HDD operation.
Cautions when installing a HDD
1. Do not apply excessive force to the HDD.
2. Pay attention so as not to lose the disassembly screws or accessories.
`` If the screws or accessories are not put together correctly, the product may breakdown or not operate properly.
3. Please check the HDD compatibility before adding a HDD.
`` Please contact your nearest dealer to obtain the list of compatible devices.
English _19
installation
Installing the HDD
JJ `` If the installed HDD had been used with other devices, it will be automatically formatted.
How to install an HDD in SRN-473S
1. After unscrewing, push back and remove the cover.
2. Loosen a setscrew of the bracket.
3. Push the bracket in the direction of the arrow on the
board and remove it.
20_ installation
4. After inserting the HDD into the bracket, tighten the
left and right screws to fix it.
● installation
5. Locate the bracket with the HDD installed in a
groove of the case, push it in the arrow direction and
connect a power data port on the board.
6. Tighten a setscrew of the bracket.
7. Close the cover, and tighten a setscrew in the back.
English _21
installation
How to install an HDD in SRN-873S
1. First of all, loosen the screws in the left, right, and
back of the case, and remove the cover.
2. Loosen a screw from the HDD bracket and remove
the bracket.
`` While applying pressure to both side end grips of the bracket,
pull them forward to remove the HDD bracket from the main
body.
RM
T3
ALA
OU
2
COMNO
1
RM
NO
IN 4
ALA
1
E
SOL
CON
TA
eSA
R
WE
VIE
7
8
5
6
E
Po RA
ME
CA
3
4
1
2
3. After aligning and inserting one side of the HDD to
the bracket, open the other side bracket wide and
insert the HDD between them.
`` Align a hole in the bracket with a screw hole in the HDD to fix
them.
22_ installation
2
3
COMNC
NO
COM G
4. Push the bracket with the HDD installed and tighten
the screws to fix it.
2
COMNO
2
COMNC
COM G
NO
3
TA
eSA
R
WE
VIE
7
8
5
6
E
Po RA
ME
CA
3
4
1
2
5. Close the cover and tighten the screws to fix it.
English _23
● installation
RM
T3
ALA
OU
1
RM
NO
IN 4
ALA
1
E
SOL
CON
installation
How to install an HDD in SRN-1673S
•• How to open the front cover and install an HDD
1. Pull open the front cover.
2. Open the front cover and check the HDD installation
bracket.
the USB connection before opening the front
JJ `` Release
cover to prevent damage to the USB port.
3. Push the latch to the right and remove the HDD
bracket.
care not to scratch your hands when removing the
JJ `` Take
HDD bracket.
24_ installation
4. Align and insert HDD into the bracket home. After
inserting one side, push and insert the other side
slightly.
● installation
5. Align the bracket with the HDD installed with the
enclosure latch, and push the bracket in the direction
of the board.
it until you hear the latch lock sound. If the HDD is
JJ `` Push
not completely connected, it may be detected.
6. Push the front cover upwards and close it.
•• How to exchange an installed HDD
1. Open a bracket wide in the direction of the arrow and
remove the holder from the HDD.
2. Open the other bracket wide and remove it from the
holder.
procedure after HDD exchange is the same as the
MM `` The
procedure for "Installing the HDD".
English _25
connecting with other device
Connecting to an External Device
MM `` The following figures are based on Model SRN-1673S.
PoE
CAME
RA
1
2
3
5
7
9
4
6
11
13
8
10
15
VIEWE
R
12
14
USB
16
SWITC
H
CONSO
LE
eSA
TA
HDMI
VGA
OUT
ALAR
AUD
IO OU
T
M IN ALA
1 2
3 4
RESRM
5 6
ET
7 8
G
NO
NC
COM NO
1
NO
COM
NO
COM
COM G
2
3
4
ALAR
M OU
T
HDMI OUT
VIDEO OUT
(VGA)
AUDIO OUT
or improper power source may cause damage to the system. Ensure that you use only the rated power source
JJ `` Unrated
before pressing the POWER button.
26_ connecting with other device
Connecting the USB
1. On the front of the product, there is a USB port.
2. USB HDD, memory, or a mouse can be connected to USB ports.
4. The product supports hot plugging function that enables connecting/disconnecting USB devices while in
operating the system.
JJ `` If you use the USB device for Backup purposes, format it with FAT32 on PC if it is not formatted on the NVR.
`` Some USB devices may fail to function properly due to compatibility issue, please check the device before using.
`` Only USB storage devices that comply with the standards (having a metal cover) are guaranteed for data transfer. In case if
the USB device’s electric contacts have been worn out, data transfer between the devices may not properly function.
English _27
● connecting with other device
3. If a USB HDD is connected to the system, recognition and settings are available in "Setup > Device > Storage
Device". (Page 83)
connecting with other device
Connecting the Alarm Input/Output
The Alarm In/Out port at the back is composed of the following.
SRN-473S
HD
MI
1
3
2
VG
A OU
T
PoE
CAM
Sensors
Alarm
•• ALARM IN 1 ~ 2 : Alarm Input Port
•• ALARM OUT 1 : Alarm Output Port
1
2
G
ALARM IN
(5mA sink)
N.O
C
1
N.C
ALARM OUT
(30VDC 2A,
125VAC 0.5A MAX)
28_ connecting with other device
ERA
4
VIE
WE
R
SRN-873S
3
4
PoE
CAM
ERA
● connecting with other device
1
2
VIE
5
6
WE
R
eSA
TA
7
8
VG
A OU
T
CO
NSO
LE
HD
MI
ALA
RM
IN
1
1 2
3 4
NO COM
ALA
RM
OUT
2
NC NO COM
3
NO COM
G
Sensors
Alarm
•• ALARM IN 1 ~ 4 : Alarm Input Port
•• ALARM OUT 1 ~ 3 : Alarm Output Port
1
2
3
4
ALARM IN
(5mA sink)
G
N.O
C
1
N.C
N.O
2
C
N.O
3
C
G
ALARM OUT
(30VDC 2A,
125VAC 0.5A MAX)
English _29
connecting with other device
SRN-1673S
1
PoE
CAME
RA
2
3
5
7
9
4
6
11
13
15
8
10
VIEWE
R
12
USB
14
16
SWITC
H
CONSO
LE
eSA
TA
HDMI
VGA
OUT
ALAR
AUD
IO OU
T
M IN ALA
1 2
3 4
RESRM
5 6
ET
7 8
G
NO
NC
COM NO
1
NO
COM
NO
COM
COM G
2
3
4
ALAR
M OU
T
Sensors
Alarm
•• ALARM IN 1 ~ 8 : Alarm Input Port
•• ALARM RESET : On receiving an Alarm Reset signal, the system cancels the current Alarm Input and
resumes sensing.
•• ALARM OUT 1 ~ 4 : Alarm Output Port
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A.R
G
ALARM IN
(5mA sink)
N.O
C
N.C
N.O
C
N.O
C
N.O
C
G
ALARM OUT
(30VDC 2A, 125VAC 0.5A MAX)
30_ connecting with other device
Connecting the Network
MM `` For more information about network connection, refer to "Network Configuration". (Page 97)
● connecting with other device
`` The following figures are based on Model SRN-1673S.
Network connection via Ethernet (10/100/1000BaseT)
PoE
CAME
RA
1
2
3
5
7
9
4
6
11
13
8
15
VIEWE
R
10
12
14
USB
16
SWITC
CON
SOL
E
eSA
TA
H
HDM
I
VGA
ALAR
OUT
AUD
IO OUT
M IN ALA
1 2
3 4
RESRM
5 6
ET
7 8
G
NO
NC
COM NO
Switch
1
NO
COM
NO
COM
COM G
2
3
4
ALAR
M OU
T
Windows
Network Viewer
Network connection via router
PoE
CAME
RA
1
2
3
5
7
9
4
6
11
13
8
10
15
VIEWE
R
12
14
USB
16
SWITC
H
CON
SOL
E
eSA
TA
HDM
I
VGA
ALAR
OUT
AUD
IO OUT
Brodband router
1
8
ALA
RESRM
ET
G
NO
COM
NO
COM
COM G
2
3
4
ALAR
M OU
T
xDSL or
Cable Modem
xDSL or
Cable Modem
Windows
Network Viewer
M IN
1 2
3 4
5 6
7
NO
NC
COM NO
NETWORK
DDNS Server
(Data Center)
English _31
connecting with other device
Connecting to Internet through PPPoE
1
PoE
CAME
RA
NETWORK
3
Phone(PPPoE)
Line
5
7
9
2
4
6
11
13
8
15
VIEWE
R
10
12
14
USB
16
CON
SOL
SWITC
H
E
eSA
TA
HDM
I
VGA
ALAR
OUT
AUD
IO OUT
Switch
Switch
PPPoE MODEM
Windows
Network Viewer
Network Camera
Network Camera
Connecting the network camera
PnP mode
ex)
IP :
PoE
CAME
RA
1
2
3
5
7
9
4
6
192.1
68.23
1.100
11
13
8
10
15
VIEWE
R
12
14
USB
16
SWITC
H
CON
SOL
E
eSA
TA
HDM
I
VGA
ALAR
OUT
AUD
IO OUT
M IN ALA
1 2
3 4
RESRM
5 6
ET
7 8
G
NO
NC
COM NO
1
Network Camera
ex) IP : 192.168.231.10
32_ connecting with other device
NO
COM
NO
COM
COM G
2
3
4
ALAR
M OU
T
M IN ALA
1 2
3 4
RESRM
5 6
ET
7 8
G
NO
NC
COM NO NO
COM
NO
COM
COM G
1
2
3
4
ALAR
M OU
T
Manual mode
1
2
3
ex)
IP :
5
9
4
6
192.1
68.1.1
00
7
11
13
8
10
15
● connecting with other device
PoE
CAME
RA
VIEWE
R
12
14
USB
16
SWITC
H
CON
SOL
E
eSA
TA
HDM
I
VGA
ALAR
OUT
AUD
IO OUT
Network Camera
M IN ALA
1 2
3 4
RESRM
5 6
ET
7 8
G
NO
NC
COM NO
Switch
1
NO
COM
NO
COM
COM G
2
3
4
ALAR
M OU
T
Switch
Network Camera
Network Camera
Network Camera
Network Camera
ex) IP : 192.168.1.20
Network Camera
ex) IP : 192.168.1.10
English _33
live
Getting Started
Starting the system
1. Connect the power cable of the NVR to the wall outlet.
2. You will see the initialization screen.
The initialization process will last about 2 minute.
If a new HDD is installed, the initialization process may take
longer.
3. The live screen appears with a beep.
34_ live
Install Wizard
As shown below, proceed through each step of the <Install Wizard>.
1. In the <Language> screen, select the language and press
the <Next> button.
If you click <
MM `` displayed.
● live
2. In the <ID/PW> screen, set the password and press
<Next>.
>, a basic guide for password setup is
3. In the <Network> screen, set the network access method
and the access environment. To use a simple intranet, click
<Next>.
•• Network 1 (Camera) : Connects to the camera and receives the video feed from the camera
•• Network 2 (Viewer) : This is a port for transmitting an image to the webviewer.
•• Network 1 / Network 2 Setup
-- IP Type : Choose the network connection method.
-- IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, DNS
the LAN cable is not connected to the port, the setting button will not be activated for use. Check the LAN cable
MM `` Ifconnection.
`` The built-in DHCP Server in NVR will turn on automatically at stage 3. At this stage, using the existing DHCP server in the
same network may cause a problem, as two DHCP servers would be simultaneously operating.
`` For more details on network settings, refer to the user manual.
4. After setting the date/time settings in the <Date/Time>
screen, click on the <Finish> button to launch the setting
completion window.
5. In the setting completion window, click on the <OK> button
to finish camera setting and launch the camera registration
screen.
English _35
live
6. If there are 16 or less cameras searched, it will be automatically registered and the camera information(fps,
days of recording) will be displayed.
•If there are 16 or less cameras searched
1. The searched camera will be automatically
registered and the initial recording value
will be displayed.
2. In the camera registration window, click the
<Cancel> button to modify the recording
settings automatically set.
•If there are more than 16 cameras searched
Camera Register
After selecting a camera, press the register button.
0/16
Cameras searched Refresh
IP
|
Authentication errors
|
|
Connected
Model
MAC
|
Network
|
Status
Disconnected
Register
Exit
Select a camera to register and click the <Register> button. Once camera registration is finished, proceed in
the same steps as after auto registration.
36_ live
Shutting Down the System
1. Press the [POWER] button for your remote controller or
select <Shutdown> in the live screen menu.
● live
2. The “Shutdown” confirmation pop-up window will appear.
3. Using the directional button on your remote control, select
<OK> and press the [ENTER] button or click on <OK>.
The system will shut down.
the user with the "shutdown" permission can shut down
MM `` Only
the system.
`` For the permission management, refer to "User > Setting Permissions". (Page 63)
Login
If you want to use the NVR menu, you need to login as a user with the privileges to access it.
1. In the live mode screen, right click the mouse button or
press the [MENU] button on your remote control.
You will see the context menu on the screen as shown.
Scene Mode
CH Info
►
Live Status
Audio Off
Freeze
Stop Alarm
Record
Keep full scr ratio
Play
Search
Backup
Menu
Quick Setup
Shutdown
►
Hide Launcher
Login
2. Select <Login>.
The login dialog appears.
if you press the menu button that requires a login with the
JJ `` Even
remote control, the login screen will appear.
`` The first administator ID is "admin" and the password must be set
in the Installation Wizard.
`` Set password for your wireless network if you use the product with
a wireless router. Being not protected with password or using the
default wireless router password may expose your video data to potential threat.
`` Please change your password every three months to safely protect personal information and to prevent the damage of the
information theft.
Please, take note that it’s a user’s responsibility for the security and any other problems caused by mismanaging a password.
MM `` To change access privileges, refer to "User > Setting Permissions". (Page 63)
English _37
live
Live Screen Configuration
Icons on the Live Screen
You can check the status or operation of the NVR with the icons on the live screen.
FULL
FULL
NO
RAID
RAID
2015-01-01 00:00:01
NO
NO
FULL
FULL
RAID
NO
RAID
RAID
SCSI
RAID
SCSI
CAM 01
Name
FULL
a
Current Date, Time
b
Login Information
FULL
FULL
c
NO
NO
NO
RAID
RAID
Description
SCSI
Displays
theRAID
current timeRAID
and date.
NO
SCSI
When you are logged in, the "LOG ON" icon will be displayed.
FULL
FULL
NO
RAID
RAID
SCSI
It is displayed when there is ongoing backup in the live condition.
If access to the recording canceling menu is restricted, then it is only displayed when
there is ongoing manual recording.
RAIDa user with the SCSI
`` Only
right to cancel recording can do so.
RAID
RAID
Screen Mode
RAID
SCSI
It is displayed when the magnifying function is in operation.
This icon is displayed when you press the Freeze button.
It is displayed when all the channels are switched at the set time interval.
It is displayed
when there
is a problem
with the fan.
FULL
NO
RAID
RAID
FULL
d
System
Operation
FULL
FULL
FULL
38_ live
NO
NO
SCSI
It is displayed when the recording data cannot be received properly due to a device
NO
RAID
RAID
SCSI
problem.
Displayed
is full and the NVR
has an insufficient space to record.
RAID if the HDD
RAID
SCSI
Displayed ifRAID
no HDD is installedSCSI
or the existing HDD should be replaced.
NO
RAID
RAID
Displayed
a technical examination.
RAID if the HDD needs
SCSI
SCSI
Name
FULL
NO
NO
RAID
RAID
RAID
d
System
Operation
RAID
RAID
It is displayed when the max permitted amount of data for each channel is exceeded.
RAID
SCSI
It is displayed when the network is overloaded.
`` It occurs when the max receiving allowance is exceeded, causing an overload to the
CPU. It will disappear if you modify the camera settings or delete a camera to reduce
the performance burden.
SCSI
It is displayed when there is firmware to update the server.
SCSI
Displayed if no input is entered in the condition that the camera is set to <ON>.
e
f
Displayed if noHD
permission to live view is granted.
Video Input
Status
If a camera is <OFF>, or if no camera is registered, or it is in <Covert2> mode, nothing
will be displayed on the screen.
If the camera is set to <Covert1>, the video will be displayed but the OSD menus will not
be displayed.
Camera Title / Channel
FULL
NO
RAID
RAID
SCSI
Display the camera title and channel number.
FULL
NO
RAID
RAID
SCSI
This icon is displayed for a channel that a PTZ-featuring camera is connected to.
FULL
FULL
g
NO
Camera
Operation
NO
RAID
RAID
SCSI
If the sensor is set to <ON>, the input signal will be displayed on the screen of the
connected channel.
RAID
RAID
SCSI
This icon is displayed when Motion Detection is set to <ON> and a camera motion or
camera event occurs.
FULL
FULL
Displays AUDIO ON/MUTE. Not displayed in video mode if deactivated.
NO
RAID
NO
RAID
RAID
It displays the status of general/event/scheduled recording.
RAID
SCSI
It is displayed when it fails to decode all the frames due to limited decoding performance
and in this case only the I-Frame is decoded.
SCSI
This is displayed when a POS (text) event occurs.
English _39
● live
ULL
NO
Description
live
Error Information
•• If the built-in HDD is not connected, the “NO HDD” icon (
) will be displayed in the top left corner. In this
case, make sure you contact the service center for assistance as this may cause a failure of recording,
playback or backup.
•• If the cooling fan does not work properly or has a problem, the <Fan Information> window will appear and
the fan error icon (
) will be displayed on the top left corner.
In this case, check to see if the internal fan works.
As a fan error can shorten the product life, make sure you contact the service center for assistance.
MM `` If you see the fan error icon or NO HDD, HDD FAIL icons on the screen, contact the service center for more details.
Live Screen Menu
Beside the functional buttons for your remote control, in the live screen mode, you can right click with the
mouse button or press the [MENU] button on your remote control to launch the live screen menu from where
you can access each menu from.
The context menu differs depending on the state of Log in/out, split mode, and NVR operation status.
view, backup, recording, stopping recording, search, PTZ, remote alarlm output, and termination menus can be
MM `` Live
restricted in use depending on user privilege settings.
Scene Mode
►
CH Info
Live Status
Record Status
PoE Status
Layout ►
PTZ Control
ZOOM
Audio►
Freeze
Stop Alarm
Capture
Record
Keep ch. scr ratio
Play
Search
Backup
Menu
Quick Setup
►
Shutdown
Hide Launcher
Logout
< Single Mode Menu >
40_ live
Scene Mode
►
CH Info
Live Status
Record Status
PoE Status
Layout
►
Audio Off
Freeze
Stop Alarm
Record
Keep full scr ratio
Play
Search
Backup
Menu
Quick Setup
►
Shutdown
Hide Launcher
Logout
< Split Mode Menu >
Single Mode Menu
The single mode menu is available only in Single Mode.
If the menu is displayed as <Screen Mode> in the single screen, it is displayed as a <Full Screen> in the
menu where only one channel is selected in the split screen.
< Single Mode Menu >
Menu
a
Full Screen
b
PTZ Control
c
d
ZOOM
Capture
a
c
● live
Scene Mode
►
CH Info
Live Status
Record Status
PoE Status
Layout ►
PTZ Control
ZOOM
Audio►
Freeze
Stop Alarm
Capture
Record
Keep ch. scr ratio
Play
Search
Backup
Menu
Quick Setup
►
Shutdown
Hide Launcher
Logout
Full Screen
CH Info
Live Status
Record Status
PoE Status
Layout►
PTZ Control
ZOOM
Audio►
Freeze
Stop Alarm
Capture
Record
Keep ch. scr ratio
Play
Search
Backup
Menu
Quick Setup
►
Shutdown
Hide Launcher
Logout
b
d
< One channel selection menu in the split screen >
Description
Select and click a desired channel in Split mode to switch to the full screen of the selected
channel.
Accesses the PTZ Control menu. The PTZ menu will be active on the Live screen after you
select a single channel. (Page 56)
You can enlarge the selected screen. (Page 49)
Captures the screen of the selected channel.
English _41
live
Split Mode Menu
In Live split mode, right-click to display this context menu as shown.
The context sensitive menu in split mode differs, depending on the login/logout status.
s
r
q
p
o
n
m
Menu
a
Screen Mode
b
CH Info
c
Live Status
d
Record Status
e
PoE Status
f
Layout
g
Audio On/Off
h
Freeze
i
Stop Alarm
42_ live
l
k
j
i
h
g
f
e
d
c
b
a
Scene Mode
►
CH Info
Live Status
Record Status
PoE Status
Layout
►
Audio Off
Freeze
Stop Alarm
Record
Keep full scr ratio
Play
Search
Backup
Menu
Quick Setup
►
Shutdown
Hide Launcher
Logout
Description
Select a screen mode for the Live screen.
Refer to “Live screen mode”. (Page 45)
It displays the camera connection information for each channel.
Refer to the “Channel Information”. (Page 47)
Shows the live status of connected camera to each channel.
Refer to “Live Status”. (Page 48)
Shows the record status of each channel.
Refer to “Record Status”. (Page 48)
Set the PoE status in each channel.
Refer to the “PoE Status”. (Page 50)
Set the layout of each channel.
Refer to “Layout”. (Page 51)
Turns ON/MUTE the sound of the selected channel.
Refer to “Audio ON/OFF”. (Page 52)
Stop playing the video temporarily. Refer to “Freeze”. (Page 52)
Stop the alarm output, deactivate the event icon and release the auto sequencing.
Refer to "Event Monitoring". (Page 53)
Menu
Description
Record/Stop
Starts/stops the standard recording.
l
m
Play
Refer to "Search & Play > Play". (Page 113)
n
Backup
o
p
q
r
s
Menu
j
k
Search
Quick Setup
Shutdown
Show/Hide Launcher
Login/Logout
Channel screen ratio is changed.
Refer to "Maintain the Screen Ratio". (Page 54)
● live
Keep full scr ratio/
Keep ch. scr ratio
Refer to "Search & Play > Search". (Page 109)
Searches for a backup device and runs backup for each channel or schedule backup later at a
more preferable time.
Enter the main menu. Refer to the menu settings. (Page 59)
The “Camera Register” & “Recording Setup” screen will immediately appear.
The system shutdown dialog will appear.
Shows or hides the launcher. Refer to "View the Launcher Menu". (Page 44)
You can log in or out.
English _43
live
View the Launcher Menu
The Launcher menu appears on the bottom of the live screen.
1. Select <Show Launcher> in the context menu of the Live
screen.
2. Move the cursor to the bottom and click a desired item in
the Launcher menu.
MM `` If no input is entered for 10 seconds, the menu will disappear.
`` The Launcher menu can be accessed only by using the mouse.
`` SRN-473S only supports full screen, 4-split screen, and automatic
switchover screen.
`` SRN-873S does not support 13/16-split screen.
a
b
Menu
a
b
Layout
c
Screen Mode
d
Menu Expansion
Button
e
Backup
f
Zoom
g
PTZ
h
i
j
k
l
m
Alarm
44_ live
Layout Setup
Freeze
Capture
Text
Play
Record
c
def ghijklm
Description
Select the layout to be displayed on the screen.
You can set, change or delete the new layout of each channel.
Displays a list of split modes available in a bar type.
The current screen mode will be displayed grey.
Click to display the hidden menu to the right.
Searches for a backup device and runs backup of each channel or schedule it for later at a more
desirable time.
Enlarges the selected area. This is available only in Single Live mode.
If the network camera connected to the selected channel supports the PTZ operations, this will run
the PTZ control launcher. This is active only in Live single mode.
Stops the alarm if it's activated.
Freezes the Live screen temporarily.
Captures the screen of the selected channel.
Text output is ON or OFF.
Enters Play mode if a file to play exist, and if not, enters Search mode.
Start/End recording the Live screen.
Live Screen Mode
16 live videos are displayed in a single screen, 6 kinds of split screens, and an automatic switchover screen.
● live
Method for displaying screen mode
If you want to change the split mode, select a screen mode suggested in the launcher menu or right click with
the mouse button and select a split mode in the screen mode menu.
Press the [MODE] button on your remote controller to change it in the order suggested in the launcher menu.
MM `` SRN-473S only supports full screen, 4-split screen, and automatic switchover screen.
`` SRN-873S does not support 13/16-split screens.
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH1
CH5
CH2
CH6
CH3
CH7
CH4
CH8
CH5
CH9
CH6
CH10
CH7CH1
CH11
CH8
CH12
CH11
CH15
CH15
CH9
CH13
CH10
CH14
CH1
CH1
CH13
CH14
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH1
CH2
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH1
CH2
CH12
CH16
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH3
CH16
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH3
CH1
16-split mode
CH1
CH5
CH2
H2
CH2
CH1
CH1
H4
CH4
CH4
CH5
CH5
CH3
CH5
CH3
CH6
CH1
CH1
CH5
CH9
CH6
CH5
CH2
CH6
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH4CH6
CH1
CH5
CH2
CH6
CH3
CH3
CH7
CH4
CH8CH6
CH5
CH2
CH9
CH6
CH3
CH10
CH7
CH4
CH11
CH8
CH7CH13
CH9
CH10
CH6
CH3
CH7
CH4
CH4
CH4
CH14
CH8
CH11
CH8
CH8
CH13CH7 CH14
CH15
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH7
CH8
8-split mode
CH9
CH6
CH13
CH6
CH2
CH1
CH13
CH10
CH14
CH11
CH15
CH12
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH16
CH8CH1
CH12
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH4CH1
CH5
CH1
CH3
CH2 CH1
CH3
CH5
CH6
CH7CH11
CH8 CH12
CH1
CH16
CH2
CH4 CH10
CH7
CH5
CH4
CH7
CH7
CH6
CH8
CH8
CH12
CH9
CH6
CH7
CH19
CH9
CH19
CH13
CH3
CH6
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
6-split mode
CH2
CH3
CH1
CH13CH3
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH4
CH1
CH4
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH2
CH4
CH5 CH3
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH3
CH4
CH2
CH5 CH3
CH6
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH7
CH8
CH1
CH5
CH2
Auto Sequence
CH5
CH1
CH4
CH4
CH4
CH4
CH4
CH2
CH1
CH3
CH2
CH2
CH6
CH2
CH1
CH3
CH9
CH5
CH5
CH7
CH1
CH9
Auto screen switching
CH2
CH3
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH5CH3
CH6
CH1
CH3CH3
CH2
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH5CH3
CH6
CH1
CH2CH3
H2
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH5CH3
CH6
CH1
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH5CH3
CH6
CH1
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH4
CH5CH3 CH8 CH6
CH1
CH2 CH5 CH3CH3 CH6
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH9 CH1
CH4
CH5CH3 CH8
CH6
CH1
CH2CH3
CH2 CH5
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH9 CH1
CH4
CH6 CH2
H5CH3 CH8
CH6
CH1
CH2 CH5 CH3
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH9 CH1
CH4
CH6
CH1
CH5 CH2 CH5
CH6 CH3 CH7
CH8
CH3 CH8 CH6
CH3
CH4
CH9
CH4
CH6
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH4
CH1
CH6
3 CH8 CH6
CH2 CH5 CH3CH3 CH6
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH9 CH1
CH4
CH6
CH1
CH3
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH2 CH5
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH8 CH6
CH9 CH1
CH4
CH6
CH1
CH2 CH5 CH3
CH3 CH2
CH4
8 CH6
CH9 CH1
CH4
CH6
CH1
CH5 CH2 CH5
CH6 CH3 CH7
CH8
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH9 CH1
CH6
CH1CH4
CH4
CH8
CH6
CH1
CH3
CH6
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH9 CH1
CH4
CH5 CH3 CH3 CH6
6
CH1
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH9 CH1
CH4
CH5 CH3
CH6
CH1
CH3
CH4
CH9
CH4
CH5 CH3
CH6
CH1
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH10
CH3
CH4
CH9
CH5
CH6
CH2
CH1CH4
CH4
CH8
CH1
CH1
CH3
CH4
CH9
CH4
CH5 CH3
CH6
CH3
CH4
9
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH10
CH11
CH3
CH4
CH4 CH5
CH5
CH6
CH1
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH4
4-split mode
13-split mode
CH5
CH3
CH4
CH1
CH3
CH1 CH8
CH4
CH16
CH10
CH6
CH3
CH5
CH15
CH12
CH3
CH11
CH8
CH2
CH1
CH1
9-split mode
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH4
CH9
CH6
CH4 CH13
CH9
CH10
CH4 CH13
CH3
CH5
CH14
CH11
CH6
CH15
CH12
CH6
CH15
CH16
CH5
CH14
CH16
CH3
CH1
CH6 CH1
CH1
CH2
CH1CH4
CH2
CH7
CH5
CH4
CH7
CH3
Single mode
CH5
CH8
CH8
CH3
CH6
CH6
CH1
CH1
CH9
CH1
CH3
CH3
CH9
CH2
CH2
CH1
CH4
CH4
CH4
CH4
CH5
CH5
CH7
CH5
SRN-1673S can display 16 live videos sequentially in full screen, 4-split screen, and 9-split screen.
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH3
CH4
CH5 CH7
H3
CH4
CH5 CH7
CH4
CH5 CH7
CH4
CH5 CH7
CH19
CH4
CH5 CH1
CH7 CH19
CH4
CH5 CH1
CH7 CH19
H4
CH5 CH1
CH2
CH7 CH19
CH5 CH1
CH2
0
CH11
CH13
CH1
CH1
CH7 CH12
CH1
CH5 CH7 CH12CH19 CH13
CH2
CH11
CH1
CH1
CH19 CH13
CH5 CH1
CH2
CH11
CH12
CH1
CH1
CH7 CH19
CH5 CH1
CH2
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH1
CH1
CH7
H5 CH1
CH2
H11
CH12CH19 CH13
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH1 CH7
CH19 CH13
CH2
1
CH12
CH1
CH1
H2
H1 CH7
CH19 CH13
CH2
CH1
CH1
CH7 CH12
CH19 CH13
CH2
CH1
CH1
H7 CH12
CH2
CH12CH19 CH13
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
H12CH19 CH13
CH1
CH1
CH2
2CH19 CH13
CH1
CH1
H19 CH13
CH2
CH1
CH1
9 CH13
CH2
CH1
CH1
CH1
H4CH13
CH2
CH1
CH1
CH2
H13
CH1
CH1
CH2
3
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH10
Single mode
MM
CH10
CH13
CH13
CH11
CH16
CH13
CH11
CH16
CH14
CH8
CH4
CH4
CH10
CH10
CH5
CH5
CH11
CH1
CH7
CH11
CH1
CH7
CH11
CH1
CH12
CH19
CH12
CH19
CH12
CH1
CH1
CH4
CH4
CH11
1
CH11
CH14
CH12
CH14
CH12
CH7
CH12
CH7
CH12
CH4
CH2
CH13
CH7
CH5
16
CH8
CH8
CH13
CH13
CH5
CH3
CH8
CH6
CH5
CH3
CH8
CH6
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH1 CH5
CH1 CH5
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH6
CH6
CH7
CH4
CH7
CH3
CH4
CH8
CH8
CH2
CH2
CH6
CH8
CH10
CH3
CH6
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH8
CH10
CH11
CH1
CH11
CH12
CH5
CH7
CH5
CH1
CH7
CH19
CH12
CH19
CH13
CH13
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH3
CH1
CH3
CH6
CH6
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH9
CH1
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
4-split mode
CH15
CH1
CH4
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH15
CH2
CH1
CH9
CH1
CH9
CH9
CH2
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH7
CH19
CH12
CH19
CH1
CH2
CH4
CH5
CH1
CH7
CH13
CH1
CH1
CH10
CH2
CH3
CH2
CH3
CH2
CH3
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH5 CH3
CH6
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH5 CH3
CH6
CH1
CH2
2
CH5 CH3
CH6
CH1
CH2
CH5 CH3
CH6
CH1
CH2
CH5 CH3
CH6
CH10
CH1
CH2
CH5 CH3 CH8 CH6
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH9
CH1
CH5 CH3 CH8 CH6
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH9
CH1
5 CH3 CH8 CH6
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH9
CH1
CH3 CH8 CH6
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH9
CH1
H3 CH8 CH6
CH3 CH2
CH4 CH13
CH9
CH1
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH8 CH6
CH9
CH1
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH8 CH6
CH9
CH1
CH3 CH2
CH4
8 CH6
CH9
CH1
CH6
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH9
CH1
H6
CH3
CH4
CH9
CH16
CH3
CH4
CH9
CH3
CH4
CH9
CH3
CH4
CH9
CH3
CH4
CH9
CH3
CH4
H9
CH3
CH4
CH3
CH4
CH8
CH6
CH3
13-16
9-12
5-8
CH1
CH4
CH1
1-4
CH1
CH10
CH10
CH15
CH13
CH14
CH12
CH12
CH5
CH5
CH7
CH7
CH11
CH11
CH2
CH2
CH4
CH8
CH8
CH3
CH1
CH3
CH6
CH6
CH9
CH1
CH3
10-16
1-9
CH3
CH9
9-split mode
CH2
CH2
CH4
CH4
CH15
`` In a split mode, If you have set <Sequence switching time> in "Device > Monitor", Auto Sequence will be conducted at
CH16
CH14
CH15
CH13
the set interval. (Page 85)
CH5
CH6
CH9
CH16
CH14
CH16
CH13
CH10
CH15
CH14
`` When a channel is changed, a video may be displayed delayed due to the network environment.
CH13
CH5
CH9
CH9
CH9
CH9
CH9
CH7
CH10
CH10
CH10
CH10
CH10
CH6
CH1
CH8
CH5CH2
CH1
CH1
CH9
CH8
CH6
CH7
CH7
CH16
CH16
CH6
CH7
CH5
CH14
CH14
CH15
CH5
CH8
CH8
CH2
CH6CH3
CH9
CH7CH4
CH5CH2 CH9
CH6CH3 CH10
CH7CH4 CH11
CH8
CH13 CH1
CH14
CH13
CH14
CH13
CH14
CH13
CH14 CH13
CH14
CH11
CH12
CH5CH2 CH9
CH6CH3 CH10
CH7CH4
CH8 CH15
CH13 CH1
CH14
CH2
CH4
CH11
CH8
CH11 CH10
CH11 CH10
CH9
CH3
CH10
CH11
CH13
CH12
CH12
CH13
CH15
CH15
CH15 CH14
CH5
CH15 CH14
CH5
CH13
CH12
CH12
CH14
CH3
CH16
CH1
CH1
CH6
CH9
CH6
CH16CH7
CH16CH7
CH12
CH16
CH16
CH9
CH8
CH10
CH10
CH11
CH8
CH11
CH1
CH4 CH1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH5CH2
CH6CH3
CH7CH4 CH1CH8
CH2
CH12
CH12
CH2
CH2
CH13
CH13
CH14
CH14
CH15
English _45
CH15
CH16
CH16
CH3
CH3
CH10
CH4
CH4
CH6
CH5
CH2
CH2
CH4
CH6 CH3
CH4
CH5
CH5
CH1
CH7
CH1
CH4
CH5
CH3
CH2
CH4
CH3
CH2
CH5
CH4
CH3
CH2
CH5
CH4
CH3
CH6
CH6
CH7
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH1
CH8
CH1
CH8
CH9
CH1
CH8
CH9
CH1
CH10
CH11
CH10
CH13
CH12
CH11
CH10
CH10CH8
CH11
CH12
CH10
CH13
CH11
CH14
CH12
CH15
CH10
CH13
CH16
CH11
CH14
CH12
CH15
CH10
CH13
CH16
CH11
CH14CH12
CH15CH13
CH16CH14 CH15 CH16
CH13
CH12
CH11
CH13
CH12
CH13
CH7 CH8
CH9CH7
CH9
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH12
CH11
CH10
CH2
CH1
CH1
CH5
CH7
CH1
CH1CH8
CH2
CH1
CH2CH3 CH1CH2CH3 CH9 CH2CH3
CH2
CH2
CH6
CH1
CH5
CH4
CH6
CH3
CH2
live
CH7
CH7
CH6
CH7
CH6
CH7
CH6
CH5
CH4
CH5
CH4
CH5
CH3
CH4
CH3
CH4 CH4 CH4 CH5
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH10
CH14
CH11
CH15
CH12
CH16
CH13
CH14 CH15CH7
CH16
CH11CH10CH4
CH12CH11
CH13CH12
CH13
CH7 CH4
CH8 CH9 CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH3
CH7
CH8
CH4
CH7
CH10CH1
CH12CH9
CH11
CH4CH5
CH4CH5CH6 CH4CH5CH6
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH9
CH9
CH2
CH1
CH1
CH5
CH2
CH2
CH6
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH7
CH5CH6
CH6
CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16
CH1
CH1
CH6
CH5
CH6
CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16
CH2
CH1
CH3
CH8
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH2
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH2
CH3
CH1
CH1
CH10
CH12
CH2
CH1 CH9 CH13CH3
CH2 CH14CH11 CH15
CH3
CH16
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH2
CH13
CH14
CH15
CH16CH1
CH7 CH1
CH8
CH9 CH2
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH4CH2
CH5
CH6
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH1CH1
CH1 CH2
CH1 CH3
CH1
CH9 CH5
CH10
CH11
CH4
CH5CH15 CH12 CH16CH6
CH13
CH14 CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH1
CH3
CH1
Manually change the screen
CH1
CH13
CH4
CH3
CH3
CH1
CH1
CH1
Press
arrow <_/+>
key
to
CH1 the left/right button on the front panel or the remote control, or click the
CH1
CH2
CH1 to move
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH1 CH2
CH2
the next split mode.
CH1
CH1
CH4
CH1
CH1
CH1
• If pressing the right [+] button in 9-split mode :
CH2
CH3 CH4 mode
CH4
CH7
CH7
CH9
CH8
CH9 CH3 (CH 10~16)
9-split
(CHCH8
1~9) mode
 9-split
CH2  Auto Sequence
CH13
CH14
CH15
CH1
CH7
CH16
CH1
CH1
CH1CH2
CH1
CH4
CH1
CH7
CH4
CH7
CH1
CH4
CH2
CH1
CH1
CH7CH8
CH1
CH3 CH10
CH3CH9
CH8
CH7CH8CH9 CH7CH8CH9
CH2
CH4
CH3
CH5
CH4 CH2
CH6
CH5
CH3
CH6
CH2
CH6
CH3
CH8
CH4
CH4
CH1
CH5
CH6
CH4
CH1
CH4
CH7
CH4
CH7
CH5
CH5
CH5
CH11
CH10
CH4
CH3
CH2
CH6
CH1
CH5
CH7
CH9 CH1
CH6
CH3
CH4
CH3
CH7
CH4
CH10
CH4
CH10
CH3
CH3
CH5CH9
CH3
CH12 CH1
CH11
CH11
CH13 CH4
CH15
CH13
CH6
CH16
CH9
CH16
CH2
CH10
CH3 CH16
CH10
CH3
CH11 CH4 CH10
CH11
CH12CH5
CH10
CH11
CH12 CH6CH11
CH1CH12
CH7
CH14
CH14
CH1
CH7
CH1
CH1CH2
CH3
CH2
CH12
;
CH7
CH5
CH4 CH15
CH1CH2CH3 CH1CH2CH3
CH4CH5
CH1
CH1
CH12
CH8
CH7
CH2
CH4
CH2
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH4
CH7CH8
CH9
CH8
CH2CH3
CH4CH5CH6 CH4CH5CH6
CH5CH6
CH7
CH2
CH6CH5
CH5
CH1
CH1
CH3
CH7
CH2
CH1
CH9
CH8
CH7
CH2
CH3
CH5CH6
CH5
CH8
CH2
CH1
CH6
CH5
CH8
CH3
CH6
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH5
CH5
CH3
CH1
CH3
CH1
CH1 CH3 CH2
CH1
CH4
CH1
CH3
CH1
CH2 CH1 CH1
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH2
CH1
CH6 CH5 CH4
CH7 CH6
CH2
CH7CH5
CH6
CH5
CH7
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH5 CH2
CH2
CH6
CH5
CH8
CH6 CH9
CH8
CH3
CH4
CH2
CH3
CH8
CH5
CH7
CH6
CH2CH4 CH7
CH5
CH3
CH6
CH9
CH8
CH5
CH8 CH11
CH12
CH2
CH4
CH1 CH14CH11 CH15CH12
CH2 CH16
CH13CH10
CH6 CH5
CH7
CH7
CH1
CH8
CH1 CH6
;
CH6 CH9CH11 CH10
CH9
CH4
CH1
CH1
CH5 CH2
CH8 CH11
CH6 CH3
CH1 CH4
CH8
CH12
CH11
CH9
CH1 CH14CH11 CH15CH12
CH2 CH16
CH13CH10
CH4
CH8 CH1
CH8
CH14CH13CH11
CH15CH14
CH13
CH10
CH9
CH10
CH9
CH12
CH11
CH10
CH9CH16CH15
CH12
CH11
CH10CH9 CH16
CH12
CH11
CH10
CH9
CH13
CH14
CH13
CH7
CH8
CH7
CH8 CH1
CH15
CH14
CH13
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH4
CH4
CH7
CH7
CH4
CH2
CH7
CH5
CH4
CH2
CH7
CH5
CH8
CH5
CH3
CH8
CH6
CH5
CH3
CH8
CH6
CH5
CH9
CH13
CH9
CH13
CH9
CH13
CH16
CH3
CH2
CH5
CH2
CH11
CH16
CH15
CH14
CH13
CH13
CH11
CH11
CH12
CH16
CH15
CH14CH3
CH14
CH12
CH12
CH13
CH14
CH15
CH11
CH12
CH16
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH14
CH2
CH15
CH4
CH5
CH5
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH3
CH3
CH7
CH7
CH7
CH7
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH7
CH8
CH5
CH6
CH2
CH7
CH5
CH8
CH8
CH9
CH8
CH9
CH3
CH3
CH1
CH11
CH11
CH10
CH12
CH8
CH14
CH11
CH12
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH15
CH16
CH9
CH13
CH13
CH10
CH14
CH11
CH12
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH15
CH16
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH7
CH6
CH9
CH4
CH2
CH7
CH5
CH5
CH3
CH8
CH6
CH5
CH3
CH8
CH6
CH9
CH1
CH1
CH3
CH6
CH9
CH3
CH2
CH2
CH4
CH4
CH4
CH13
CH13
CH15
CH6
CH9
CH16
CH2
CH14
CH13
CH13
CH3
CH16
CH16
CH9
CH4
CH10
CH14
CH15
CH14
CH15
CH15
CH3
CH14
CH2
CH3
CH12
CH2CH16
CH15
CH16
CH9
CH1
CH3
CH12
CH8
CH8
CH6
CH9
CH10
CH4
CH2
CH7
CH5
CH2
CH14
CH13 CH15CH14
CH16
CH14
CH16
CH16
CH16
CH16
CH4
CH14
CH16
CH15
CH1
CH12
CH4
CH11
CH4
CH3
CH1
CH10
CH5
CH10
CH8
CH6
CH3
CH9
CH11
CH6
CH8
CH6
CH5
CH3
CH9
CH8
CH2
CH5
CH3
CH3
CH14
CH13
CH15
CH2
CH14
CH15
;
CH12CH15 CH1 CH16
CH15
CH7
CH3
CH2
CH2
CH9
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH7
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH5
CH6
CH1
CH8
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH7
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH5
CH6
CH1
CH8
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH13
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH5
CH6
CH1
CH8
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH13
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH13
CH7
CH5
CH4
CH2
CH12
CH9
CH14
CH13 CH14
CH12
CH1
CH1
CH3
CH3
CH1
CH4
CH2
CH12CH15
CH4
CH16 CH3
CH1
CH6
CH8
CH4
CH7
CH4
CH4
CH6
CH7
CH2
CH1
CH1
CH7
CH5
CH4
CH16
CH15CH3
CH15
CH16
CH4
CH1
CH1
CH10
CH9
CH2
CH1
CH4
CH1
CH6
CH10
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH10
CH12
CH2
CH2
CH4
CH10
CH6
CH9
CH1
CH3
CH3
CH11CH8
CH15 CH2 CH16
CH14
CH13 CH15
CH16
CH3CH12
CH12
CH11
CH10
CH9
CH12
CH11
CH10
CH9CH14 CH12
CH11
CH10CH15 CH12
CH11 CH16
CH16
CH15
CH14CH13 CH16
CH15CH14
CH13 CH16CH15
CH14
CH13
CH2
CH1
CH1
CH3
CH3
CH9 CH2
CH16
CH15
CH14
CH13
CH8
CH1
CH3
CH9
CH12
CH11
CH9 CH6
CH13
CH13
CH13
CH10
CH9 CH12CH10CH13 CH10
CH13
CH11
CH12
CH4
CH10CH1
CH1
CH10
CH10
CH10
CH11
CH5
CH3
CH9
CH11
CH3
CH13
CH9
CH9
CH2
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH3
CH2
CH1 CH3 CH8
CH4
CH3
CH2CH7
CH7 CH4
CH10
CH2
CH5
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH9
CH9
CH8
CH8
CH1
CH1 CH14
CH2 CH16
CH1 CH14
CH13
CH15 CH4
CH13
CH4
CH3
CH2
CH7 CH4
CH3
CH2
CH7
CH3
CH2
CH7
CH4
CH3
CH2
CH4
CH3
CH4
CH3
CH4
CH9
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH10CH9 CH7
CH11CH10 CH8
CH12CH11 CH9 CH12
CH9
CH10
CH9
CH11
CH10
CH12
CH11
CH12
CH3
CH6
CH5
CH7
CH6
CH5
CH8
CH7
CH6
CH5 CH6 CH8
CH7
CH6CH5 CH8
CH7 CH6
CH5 CH8
CH1
CH6
CH5
CH8
CH1
CH6
CH5 CH4 CH8
CH1
CH6
CH8
CH1
CH8
CH4
CH5
CH1
46_ live
CH7
CH7
CH1
CH6 CH3 CH7 CH4
CH1
CH3
CH8
CH7
CH8
CH7
CH4 CH7
CH5 CH9 CH6 CH10CH7 CH11CH8
CH1
CH7
CH2 CH7
CH3 CH2
CH3 CH4
CH2
CH1 CH4
CH3
CH4
CH3
;
CH2CH5
CH2
CH4
CH4
CH1
CH6
CH6
CH9
;
CH5
CH1
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH6
CH4
CH2 CH3
CH2
CH1
CH5
CH6
CH9
CH6
CH4
• If pressing the right [+] button in 4-split mode :
CH7
CH3CH9
CH4
CH3
CH4
CH7CH8CH9 CH7CH8CH9
CH9
Channel
(CH 1~4)  Channel (CH 5~8)  Channel (CH 9~12)
 ChannelCH8
(CHCH313~16)
CH4CH3
AutoCH4Sequence
CH1
CH6 CH3
CH3
CH2
10-16
CH4
1-9
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH2
CH9
CH2 CH1
CH1
CH9
CH9
CH4
CH2
CH8CH9
CH1
CH6
CH6
CH8
CH9 CH3
CH3
CH8
CH3
CH4
CH7CH8CH9 CH7CH8CH9
CH1
CH2
CH7
CH7
CH1CH2CH3CH8
CH1CH2CH3
CH4CH5CH6 CH4CH5CH6
CH3
CH6
CH5 CH4
CH15
CH7
CH1CH12
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH8
CH9
CH16
CH9 CH7
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH6
CH7
CH1
CH4CH5CH8 CH4
CH5
CH6 CH11
CH4CH5CH6CH12 CH9
CH5
CH13
CH6
CH13
CH6
CH14CH7 CH13
CH15
CH15
CH14
CH15
CH4
CH5
CH10 CH13
CH11CH14
CH12
CH13 CH14
CH15
CH16 CH4CH15
CH10
CH13
CH8CH14
CH9
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH8
CH1
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16
CH1
CH2
CH5
CH7CH8
CH7CH8CH9 CH7CH8CH9
CH8
CH16
CH9
CH16
CH9
CH16
CH16
CH7
CH7CH8
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16
CH8
CH2
CH1
CH1 CH6
CH5
CH5
CH4
CH2
CH1
CH4
CH2
CH1
CH4
CH7
CH4
CH1
CH2
CH3 CH3
CH3 CH7
CH2
CH6
CH15
CH14
CH4CH8
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH2 CH1
CH3CH2 CH1
CH6
CH3CH12
CH11
CH3
CH7
CH2
CH6
CH1
CH1
CH9CH2
CH2
CH1CH2
CH9
CH5CH2 CH1CH6
CH5
CH14
CH13
CH4
CH6
CH6
CH1CH8
CH5
CH3CH9
CH5
CH1
CH4
CH3
CH9
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH8
CH4
;
CH6
CH13
CH5
CH4
CH8
CH7 CH3
CH9
CH8
CH1
CH1CH2CH3CH4
CH1CH2CH3
CH2CH2
CH5
CH7
CH3
CH1
CH6
CH5CH6
CH4
CH5
CH7 CH1
CH4
CH3
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH2CH3
CH2
CH3
CH4CH5CH6CH2CH4CH5CH6
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH1CH5
CH3
CH2
CH1CH2CH3 CH1CH2CH3CH2
CH1
CH2
CH8
CH3
13-16
9-12
5-8
1-4
CH6
CH9
CH1
CH1
CH5
CH1
CH10
CH5
CH6
CH11
CH6
CH7
CH4
CH5
CH7
CH8
CH16
CH14
CH3
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH5
CH3
CH6
CH6
CH7
CH7
CH4
CH4
CH8
CH8
CH1
CH19
CH19
CH7
CH8
CH8
CH10
CH10
CH11
CH1
CH11
CH12
CH14
CH5
CH12
CH13
CH15
CH9
CH3
CH12
CH3
CH4
CH6
CH2
Channel Setting
CH13
CH13
CH13
CH6
CH1
CH4
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH9
CH1
CH1
CH10
CH13
CH14
CH12
CH15
CH16
CH15
CH7
CH16
CH8
CH11
You can display the channel in a desired area of a split screen.
1. Place the cursor over the camera name
ofCH2eachCH3channel
to display the <▼> key to the right on the screen.
CH1
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH9
CH10
CH13
CH2
● live
CH1 CH2 a channel
CH2 CH3
CH3
2. Click a camera name CH1
to display
list where
you
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8 can select a different channel.
CH14
3. Select a desired channel
it.CH9 CH6 CH10
CH11
CH12
CH4 click
CH5
CH6
CH4 and
CH5
The selected channel is displayed inCH13
the screen.
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH3
CH1
CH7
CH8
CH11
CH12
CH15
CH16
CH3place CH4
CH7 CH8
CH8
CH9you
CH1 If CH1
CH3can
CH9
you want to changeCH7
the channel
location,
yourCH4
mouse cursor over the desired location.
CH1
CH1
CH2
`` Ex : If you want to change channel 1 area to channel 7 area.
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH6 CH11 CH7
CH10 CH11
CH10 CH5
CH12
CH8
CH12
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH13 CH14
CH14 CH15
CH13
CH12
CH15
CH13
CH16
CH14
CH15
;
CH16
CH3
CH7
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH1
CH8
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH16
Switching to Single Mode
CH7
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH8
Double
click CH6
with the mouse
button
on the desired
channel in the
split
screen
toCH14switch the screen to the single
CH9
CH10
CH13
CH5
CH9
CH10
CH13
CH14
screen.
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
Press the channel number button on the remote control to switch to single screen.
CH13
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH7
CH8Controller >CH11
CH11 the Number
CH12 Button". (Page
CH15
CH7
CH8
CH12
CH15
Refer
to "Remote
Using
16) CH16 CH16
CH5
CH5
CH6
CH1
CH6
`` Ex : With your mouse, double click on channel 3 or press the number 3 on the remote control.
CH1
CH1CH2
CH2CH3
CH3CH4
CH4
CH5
CH5CH6
CH6CH7
CH7CH8
CH8
CH9
CH9CH10
CH10
CH11
CH11
CH12
CH12
CH13
CH13
CH14
CH14
CH15
CH15
CH16
CH16
;
CH3
CH1
CH3
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH1
Channel information
CH7
CH7CH2
CH2CH3
CH3CH4
CH4
CH5CH6
CH6CH1
CH1CH8
CH5
Select
the <CH
Info>
inCH8the live screen menu to check the
CH9CH10
CH10
CH11
CH12
status
of camera
connection
to each channel.
CH9
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH13
CH14
CH14
CH15
CH15
CH16
CH16
English _47
live
Live Status
Select <Live Status> from the live screen menu to display
status and transfer information of connected camera to each
channel.
•• Model : Displays the camera model name connected to each
channel.
•• Status : Displays the status of camera connection set to each
channel.
•• IP Address : Displays the IP address of a camera set to each
channel.
•• Codec : Displays the live profile codec information for a
camera set to each channel.
•• Resolution : Displays the live profile resolution of a camera set to each channel.
•• Frame Rate : Displays the live profile transmission rate for a camera set to each channel.
•• Quality : Displays the live profile transmission quality of a camera set to each channel.
Record Status
Select <Record Status> from the live screen menu to display
camera profile, input/recording frame rates, input/limit/recording
bps of each channel.
•• Total Bitrate (Record/Max) : Record bitrate shows the amount
of actual data recording while Total bitrate shows the
maximum data transfer allowed by the NVR.
•• Profile : Shows the video profile configured to each channel.
•• Frame (fps) : Show the input/record frames per second for
each channel.
•• Bitrate (bps)
-- Limit / Input / Record : Shows the amount of limit/input/recording data for each channel.
-- Input / Limit : Shows the data ratio of actual data transferred from the camera and allowed maximum
defined by user.
•• current : Shows the recording status information of currently transferred data.
•• MAX : Shows recording information of the most biggest recording data out of configured standard and event
recordings.
••
: Reloads the recording information.
•• Record Setup : The menu screen will switch to the record setting screen.
warning message on the list's bottom means the NVR replaced the selected recording profile with other available profile,
MM `` The
since the selected one does not produce video data which prohibits screen saving. If the screen displays video, it
automatically resets to the selected profile and its name turns to yellow in the list.
`` If Key Frame recording exceeds the allowed data amount specified by limit bitrate, a popup alert and icon appear on the
screen.
The limited recording alert popup does not repeat after displaying once unless camera or recording settings are changed; it
may appear again if settings were changed to notify such status.
If you want to set the alert popup not to appear, change your setting of <Setup Warnings> not to display a message popup.
For further information on bitrate limit of recording data, refer to “Record Setting”. (Page 90)
48_ live
Zoom
This is activated only in Live Single mode.
After selecting a single screen, if you use the Magnify function, the selected area will be magnified by 2.
2. You can use the remote control's directional key(▲▼◄►) or drag with the mouse to set the area of
magnification.
3. Press the [ENTER] button or double click with the mouse to magnify the selected area by two times.
`` In the magnified screen, you can drag with the mouse or use the remote control's navigational key (▲▼◄►) to move the
magnified area.
4. In the live screen menu, select <Zoom Out>.
Press the [ZOOM] button on your remote control or click <
magnification function.
> on the launcher menu to cancel the
;
<Normal>
<Enlarged twice>
English _49
● live
1. In the live screen menu, select <ZOOM>.
> on the launcher menu.
Press the [ZOOM] button on your remote control or click <
The Magnify icon in the middle of the screen will be displayed.
live
PoE Status
In the live screen, you can see the PoE status of each port.
1. Select the <PoE Status>.
PoE status view window is displayed.
•• Consumption(W) : Displays the power consumption in PoE.
-- 0 : No device is connected to the port or a device is using
its own power supply.
-- – : Trouble in the port (More detailed trouble information can
be displayed in additional information.)
PoE power specifications are as follows: SRN-1673S(16 ports)
MM `` Overall
is 200W, SRN-873S(8 ports) is 100W, and SRN-473S(4 ports) is 50W.
If a single port exceeds 36W, or the power to all ports exceeds the overall PoE power specifications, the power to ports will be shut
off sequentially.
•• PoE : Turns on/off the power supply to the camera.
If checked, it means the power supply is On; if not checked, it means it is Off.
•• Additional information : If there is a problem in the power supply, it is explained here.
Power supply problems include excessive power (class 1 to 4) and voltage errors.
•• Total PoE power consumption : Display the sum of power consumption for all the ports.
2. Press <Return> to move to the previous screen.
Noise level according to PoE power consumption
50_ live
Model
Noise Level [dB]
PoE Power
SRN-1673S
48
154W
47
138W
50
196W
Layout
In the live screen, you can set the layout for each channel.
This section outlines how to select a series of channels based on their purpose/accessibility and monitor them
in a single layout.
Example) Layout "Lobby" - Lobby camera 1, Lobby camera 2, Front entrance camera 2
Layout "VIP" - Directors' meeting room 1, Directors' meeting room 2, Directors' lounge 1, Corridor camera on
the 7th floor
c
b
g
a
f
e d
To create a new layout, follow these steps:
a Open the channel layout setup menu.
b Click <New>.
c Enter a name for the selected channels (e.g., ELEVATOR).
d Select the channels that you want to add to the layout (e.g., 2, 7, 10, 15).
e Choose a split mode to apply (e.g., 4-way split).
f Click <OK>.
g Choose a layout to view it on the screen (e.g., change to ELEVATOR).
>.
1. Select the <
The layout setting screen will appear.
•• New : You can set the new layout.
•• Rename : You can make changes to the selected layout.
When the layout is changed, the channel order is initialized.
•• Delete : You can delete the selected layout.
•• Ch. Table : You can select channels in the table to be registered in, or removed from the layout.
•• Channel List : You can select channels in the list to be registered in, or removed from the layout.
2. Press the <New> button and enter the name of layout to add.
3. In the <Ch. Table> or <Channel List>, click and select the channel to be displayed on the layout screen.
4. Click on <OK> to save the selected layout.
MM `` The layout for each user is saved separately.
English _51
● live
Setting Up the Live Layout
live
Audio ON/OFF
You can turn the sound on/off corresponding to the channel in Live mode.
AUDIO ON/OFF in Single mode
In the screen, click on the audio icon (
) or in the remote control, press the [AUDIO] button to turn it on/off.
there is no audio output even if output is activated, check whether the connected network camera supports audio and
MM `` Ifaudio
settings.
The sound icon can be displayed if the sound signal fails to output from noise.
`` Only the channel where <AUDIO> is set to <ON> in "Setting the Device > Camera" displays the audio icon (
mode that you can use to turn the sound on/off.
Freeze
This is available only in Live mode, this pauses playing the Live image temporarily.
1. Press the [FREEZE] button on your remote control or click <
Video playing is paused.
2. Press the [FREEZE] button on your remote control or click <
Pause is canceled. Playing is resumed.
52_ live
> in launcher mode.
> in launcher mode.
) in Live
CH3
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH6
CH5
CH9
5 CH7
7 CH19
19 CH13
13
6
Event Monitoring
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH1
This will display the channel in sync with a specific event (Sensor/Motion/Video Loss) if it occurs.
In "Monitor > Event Display", set the event monitoring to ON/OFF and specify the event display time. (Page 85)
•• If multiple events occur simultaneously, the screen will switch to a split mode.
-- 2~4 events : 4-split mode
-- 5~9 events : 9-split mode
CH3
CH1
CH6
CH9
● live
3
CH1
CH1
CH10
CH3
CH3
9
CH12
-- 10~16 events : 16-split mode
•• If the second event occurs within the set time of <Event Display>, the first event will last until the second one
CH2terminated.
is
CH2
CH13
CH14
`` ExCH4
: If you set <Event
Display> to 5 seconds, and only one event occurs in CH 1.
EventCH4
occurrence
CH15
CH16
5 seconds
Stop alarm
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH10
CH10
occurred in CH 1.
CH13
CH12
CH12
`` ExCH13
: If you set <Event
CH14 Display> to 5 seconds, and the second event occurs in CH 2 within the set time after the first event
Event occurrence
CH14
CH15
CH15
CH16
4 seconds
9 seconds
CH16
CH1
CH1
CH2
Stop alarm
CH2
CH1
CH1
MM `` Press the [ALARM] button or select <Stop Alarm> to initialize the alarm output status and cancel the event function.
`` If an alarm is output with the pre-event and post-event times specified together with the event recording settings, the event
recording will perform according to the specified recording type (pre event or post event).
case of continuous events such as motion detection, switching to another split mode display may not immediate if
JJ `` Inconcatenating
events follow, even when you stopped alarm of the event.
`` The video may be delayed depending on the network condition.
`` The event output can be delayed as the transfer of the alarm event from the network camera takes time.
English _53
live
Maintain the Screen Ratio
The screen ratio for a live video can be changed.
Maintain a screen ratio for all channels
Video screen ratio for all channels can be changed in live split screen mode.
1. Select <Keep full scr ratio> from the live screen menu.
The screen ratio for all channels will be changed.
2. If you want to go back to the previous screen ratio, check the menu option for <Keep full scr ratio>.
Scene Mode
►
CH Info
Live Status
Record Status
PoE Status
Layout
►
Audio Off
Freeze
Stop Alarm
Record
Keep full scr ratio
Play
Search
Backup
Menu
Quick Setup
►
Shutdown
Hide Launcher
Logout
;
Maintain a channel screen ratio
If you select a channel from a live single screen or split screen, you can change its video screen ratio.
1. Select <Keep ch. scr ratio> from the live screen menu.
The screen ratio of a specified channel will be changed.
2. If you want to go back to a previous screen ratio, select <Keep ch. scr ratio> again.
Scene Mode
►
CH Info
Live Status
Record Status
PoE Status
Layout ►
PTZ Control
ZOOM
Audio►
Freeze
Stop Alarm
Capture
Record
Keep ch. scr ratio
Play
Search
Backup
Menu
Quick Setup
►
Shutdown
Hide Launcher
Logout
54_ live
;
Display Text
Change text output
Onions
● live
The NVR can display text on a live screen when a text device is set.
3.59
CHIP
2.37
Apple
2.69
Goat
0.79
Cheese
0.69
Onions
1.58
Peppers red, loose 0.59
2 x 0.79
Pasta
1.18
0.59
2 x 0.59
1.18
========================
TOTAL
3.63
TEXT 01
Select text output
This is executable when a text device is connected.
•• How to turn the text output off : Select "OFF" from the text list.
•• How to display on other devices differently from the preset device : Select a device to display from the text list.
OFFOFFOFFOFF
Cheese
0.69
Onions
1.58
Peppers red, loose 0.59
2 x 0.79
1.18
Cheese
0.69
Onions
1.58
Peppers red, loose 0.59Peppers red, loose 0.59
2 x 0.79
2 x 0.79
1.18
TEXT 01
2 x 0.79
TEXT 01
1.18
TEXT 01
1.18
TEXT 01
OFF
Cheese
0.69
Onions
1.58
Peppers red, loose 0.59
OFF
2 x 0.79
1.18
TEXT 01
OFF
2 x 0.79
Onions
3.59
CHIP
2.37
Apple
2.69
Goat
0.79Onions
Cheese
0.69
Onions
1.58Goat
Peppers red, loose 0.59
2 x 0.79
Pasta
1.18
0.59
2 x 0.59
TEXT 01
TOTAL
3.59
CHIP
2.37
Apple
2.69
0.79
Cheese
0.69
Onions
1.58
Peppers red, loose 0.59
2 x 0.79
1.18
1.18
========================
Cheese
0.69
Onions
1.58
Peppers red, loose 0.59
1.18
TEXT 01
Cheese
0.69
Onions
1.58
Peppers red, loose 0.59
2 x 0.79
2 x 0.79
0.69
1.58
Cheese
0.69
Onions
1.58
Peppers red, loose 0.59
1.18
TEXT 01
Cheese
0.69
Onions
1.58
Peppers red, loose 0.59
Cheese
Onions
OK
3.63
1.18
TEXT 01
OFF
TEXT 01
English _55
live
PTZ Control
With this NVR, you can configure the settings of a PTZ camera as well as commercial cameras in the market to your
preference.
PTZ device
This is active only if a channel that a PTZ camera is connected to is selected.
Getting started with PTZ operations
The PTZ camera will be activated only if the channel of the PTZ camera is selected, which can be performed in
the following way:
Scene Mode ►
CH Info
Live Status
Record Status
PoE Status
Layout►
PTZ Control
ZOOM
Audio►
Freeze
Stop Alarm
Capture
Record
Keep ch. scr ratio
Play
Search
Backup
Menu
Quick Setup ►
Shutdown
Hide Launcher
Logout
•• Using the remote control : Press the [PTZ] button on your remote control.
•• Using the launcher menu : Click <
> from the launcher menu of the Live screen.
•• Using the Live screen menu : Select <PTZ Control> in the context menu of the Live screen.
•• Using the icons on the Live screen : Simply click the <
MM `` This is available only if a PTZ camera is connected and the <
> icon on the Live screen.
> icon is displayed on the screen.
`` Even if the connected network camera does not support the PTZ operations, you can configure the PTZ control settings
(if possible) by installing the PTZ driver (physical device).
`` It only supports a network camera with Samsung Techwin's PTZ function and a camera registered in the ONVIF.
56_ live
Using the PTZ camera
You can use a single PTZ camera to perform the Pan, Tilt and Zoom operations to monitor multiple places, and
configure the custom settings of the presets in a desired mode.
● live
1. Open the <PTZ Control> menu.
The <
> icon in the left bottom of the screen will turn yellow, indicating that the system accesses "PTZ
Control" mode. You will see the "PTZ Control" launcher menu.
PTZ working (active) mark can be active even if the PTZ operation is not available in normal mode. So ensure that you
MM `` The
have completed the PTZ settings before proceeding.
2. Adjust the camera recording location by using the PTZ ball in the launcher menu or press the left/right
(▲▼◄►) button on your remote control to move the camera recording location.
•• Sensitivity : Adjust sensitivity for Pan, Tilt controls.
•• PTZ Wheel : Click a near area from the center to move the camera lens slowly; clicking a far area will move it
fast.
`` If clicking and holding the mouse in the left will turn the camera counterclockwise; if clicking and holding the mouse in the right
will move the camera lens clockwise.
•• Zoom : Activate the Zoom operation of the PTZ camera.
•• Iris : Adjust the amount of light incoming to the camera.
•• Focus : You can adjust the focus manually.
•• Swing : Swing is a monitoring function that moves between two preset points and enables you to trace the
motion.
•• Group : The group function enables you to group various presets before calling them in sequence.
•• Trace : Tracking remembers the trace of movements that you instructed and reproduces it for your reference.
•• Tour : Monitor all the groups created by a user in turn.
`` Some cameras may differ in the menu title and operation with regard to Swing, Group, Tour and Trace.
if the network camera supports the PTZ operations by default, the PTZ control can be enabled only if the applicable
JJ `` Even
menu is active in the launcher menu.
English _57
live
Preset
Preset is a specific position remembered by the PTZ camera. You can use the Preset function to define up to
255 presets for a single PTZ camera.
To add a preset
1. Check the preset checkbox.
2. Select <
>.
The virtual keyboard will appear on the screen. Use it to provide the preset name.
••
••
••
`` Refer to "Using Virtual Keyboard". (Page 61)
: You can change the preset settings to your preference.
: Delete a selected preset.
: Delete all the existing preset settings.
MM `` You can add up to 255 presets, which is the max count supported by the NVR.
`` If you replace a camera that saves your preset settings with a different one, you must configure the preset settings again.
3. Select <OK>.
The preset setting will be saved in the provided name.
If you want to change or delete the preset name
1. Check the preset checkbox and select a preset to change or delete.
2. If you selected <
If you selected <
••
>, enter the desired name and press OK.
>, press OK to delete it.
: Delete all the existing preset settings.
JJ `` If you delete the entire presets, the default presets specified in the network camera can be deleted accordingly.
58_ live
menu setup
You can setup the system, devices, and options for recording, event and network.
System Setup
You can setup Date/Time/Language, User, System Properties and Log.
Setting the Date/Time/Language
You can check and setup the current Date/Time and time related properties, as well as the language used for
the interface on the screen.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  <System>  ►  <Date/Time/Language> 
[ENTER]  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
•Date : Sets the date and its format that will appear on the screen.
•Time : Sets the time and its format that will appear on the screen.
•Time Zone : Sets the time zone of your area based on the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
`` GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) is standard World Time and the basis of world time zone.
•Time Sync. : Specify the use of synchronization with the time server.
Click the <Setup> button to display time synchronization setup screen.
If you select to use the <Time Server>, the current time will be synchronized on a regular basis by the server
defined as <Time Server>.
If this is the case, you cannot change the time setting manually.
-- Synchronization : Specify the use of synchronization with the time server.
-- Time Server : Enter an IP or URL address of the time server.
-- Last Sync Time : Displays the most recent synchronization time from the selected time server.
-- Activate as Server : Set to <Use> to allow the NVR to act as a Time Server for other NVRs.
•DST : Set up Daylight Saving Time with its period to make the time earlier than the GMT of its time zone by 1
hour during the set period.
•Language : Select your language. Sets the language for the interface.
English, French, German, Spanish, Italian, Chinese, Russian, Korean, Polish, Japanese, Dutch, Portuguese,
Turkish, Czech, Danish, Swedish, Thai, Romanian, Serbian, Croatian, Hungarian, Greek, Finnish, and
Norwegian are supported.
English _59
● Menu Setup
Date/Time/Language
menu setup
•Holiday : A user can select specific dates as holidays according to their own preferences.
Holidays are applied in the <Recording Schedule> or <Alarm Schedule> setting too.
`` e.g.) The day of January 7th is selected and <1/7> is checked only, January 7th is set to be a holiday every year. If both <1/7>
and <Jan First Wed> are checked, both January 7th and the first Wednesday of January are set to be holidays every year.
To use the calendar
Use the mouse to select items more easily.
1. Select year and month.
After selecting the <
> keys in the screen on the left/right of the wheel, press the [ENTER] button to
move back/forward in increments of three months.
2. Select a date by using the directional button and press the [ENTER] button.
`` A date is marked in gray if there exist data for search for system log, event log, time search and event search.
60_ menu setup
User
You can set permissions of each user over the NVR's specific function and settings.
You can set and change Administrator's ID and password.
The administrator can use and set all menu items and functions.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  <System>  ►▼  <User>  [ENTER]  ▼ 
<Administrator>  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
•ID : Change the admin ID.
•New P/W : Enter new password.
MM `` The first administator ID is "admin" and the password must be set in the Installation Wizard.
`` Please change your password every three months to safely protect personal information and to prevent the damage of the
information theft.
Please, take note that it's a user's responsibility for the security and any other problems caused by mismanaging a password.
`` If you click <
Using Virtual Keyboard
>, a basic guide for password setup is displayed.
1. For alphanumeric inputs, the virtual keyboard window appears.
2. Using the directional key(▲▼◄►), move to the desired text tab and press the
[ENTER] button.
3. In the upper text input box of the virtual keyboard, there displays a list of
candidate words containing the selected character.
4. Select a word from the list, or use the keyboard to enter the whole word.
`` If there are many of candidate words, use <
> buttons to move between them forward
and backward.
5. Select <OK>.
Entered word is applied.
``
``
``
``
For upper case letters, use <Caps Lock> button.
For special characters, use <Shift> button.
Using the virtual keyboard is the same to a normal keyboard use in your region.
ID allows alphanumeric characters only.
English _61
● Menu Setup
Setting the Administrator
menu setup
User setting
You can create a group or set permissions for each group.
You can add a user and edit the registered user information.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ►▼  <System>  <User>  [ENTER]  ▼► 
<User>  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
If you want to add a group
1. Click on the [
] button to launch the Group Addition popup window.
If you want to add a group, click on <OK>.
2. Press the group name item to launch the virtual keyboard used to enter group names.
Enter the group name to register.
`` You can add a maximum of 10 groups.
If you want to set group permission
Set permission to access each group.
Each group's users can only access items with a check mark beside them.
1. Select the menu to set group permissions.
The menu with access permissions will appear when a user of the group logs in.
•Live View : You can set permissions to access the live screen for each channel.
•Search : You can set permissions to access the search menu for each channel.
•Backup : You can set permissions to access the backup menu for each channel.
•Menu : You can select and set the setting menu that can be accessed. A group user can only access the
menu selected. If you select the menu, the menu permission setting screen will be displayed.
•Record, Record Stop, PTZ, Remote Alarm Out, Shutdown : You can select these functions to add to a
group's permissions.
2. Click <OK>.
Check a group user to give them the permission to access the selected item.
62_ menu setup
If you want to register a user
● Menu Setup
1. Click on the [
] button to launch the user addition popup window.
To add a user, click on <OK>.
2. Select a group.
When registering a user, the selected group will be automatically registered.
`` A group can be changed after inputting all required information.
3. Enter name, ID, password and select whether to use the viewer.
If you activate use of <Viewer>, you will have the right to use the web viewer and the network viewer.
4. Click <OK>.
Registered user information will be saved.
When you want to delete the group and user information
1. To delete, click on the [
] button.
2. The deletion confirmation window will appear and you can select an item to delete and click on <Delete>.
Setting Permissions
You can set restricted access for all general users.
Items with restrictions will require logging in for use.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  <System>  ►▼  <User>  [ENTER]  ▼► 
<Permission Setup>  [ENTER]  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
•Restricted Access : All menu items allowed for a user can be set with restricted access.
-- Checked (
) : Restricted
-- Not checked (
) : Accessible
`` If it is checked (
) in <Restricted Access>, a user can access the item only if the user has permission in <Permission> setting.
`` If it is not checked (
) in <Restricted Access>, any user can access the item no matter what the <Permission> setting.
English _63
menu setup
•Restriction on Network Access : Restricts remote access from a <Restricted Access> network.
-- All Network : Restricts all access instances via Network Viewer and Web Viewer.
-- Web Viewer : Restricts access via the Web Viewer, Smart Viewer.
•Auto Log out : A user will be automatically logged out if there is no operation on NVR for over set period of
time.
•Manual Input of ID : In the login window, select whether to enter ID.
If the user has restricted access
If a new group is restricted to access the entire menus, the users belonging to the group can access only the
basic menus and can change only their respective password.
If all permissions are restricted, you will see only some menu items accessible in the Live screen menu.
To change the user password
If you log in with the user account of a group with restricted access, you just can change your own password.
1. Provide the login information.
2. Select <User Menu>.
The Permission Management screen appears.
3. Select <User>.
The Password dialog shall appear.
4. Provide a new password.
5. Select <OK>.
The old password will be changed to a new one.
64_ menu setup
System Management
You can check the system version, update to a newer version, as well as data backup and initialization.
You can check the current software version and MAC address before proceeding with the upgrade.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  <System>  ►▼  <System Management> 
[ENTER]  ▼  <System Information>  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
•System Information : Shows the current system's information.
The values can not be changed by a user.
•S/W Upgrade : Updates the NVR's software up to date.
•Device Name : Displayed if the network viewer is connected to NVR.
English _65
● Menu Setup
Checking the System Information
menu setup
To upgrade the current software version
1. Connect a device storing the software to be updated.
`` It may take about 10 seconds to recognize the device.
`` Upgradeable devices include USB memory, and network device.
`` To update the network, the current NVR should have been connected to the network.
Upgrade via the proxy server may not be enabled due to the restricted access.
2. Select <System Management> from <System> window.
3. Select <System Information>.
4. When the recognized device appears, select <Upgrade>.
`` If you connect a device in the upgrade menu window, you can press the <
`` If there is an upgrade image on the network, the popup window will appear.
> button to search for available software.
`` The <Upgrade> button will be activated only if the current <Software Version> of the <System Information> is same to or
older than that of <S/W Upgrade>.
5. Press <OK> in the "S/W Upgrade" window.
`` While updating, it shows the progress.
6. When the updating is done, it automatically restarts.
Do not turn the power off until it finishes restarting.
"Upgrade Failed" appears, retry from the step 4.
MM `` IfWhen
you experience continued failure, consult the service center for assistance.
66_ menu setup
Settings
You can copy and import the NVR settings by using a storage media.
•Storage Device : Shows the connected storage device.
•Export : Exports NVR settings to the connected storage device.
•Import : Imports NVR settings from the storage device and applies to the NVR.
-- Uncheck the checkbox of an item(s) that you want to import.
Only the other items than the selected one will be applied to the NVR.
-- You cannot retrieve the configuration file from another mode. In other words, in PnP mode, you cannot
retrieve the manual setting information. In manual setting mode, you cannot retrieve the PnP setting
information.
•Load Factory Default : Restore the factory default settings of NVR.
Uncheck the checkbox of an item(s) that you want to reset. Then, only the other items than the selected one
will return to the factory default.
If <Initialization> is selected, a confirmation dialog for "Load Factory Default" prompts. Press <OK> to
initialize the system to the factory default.
`` After changing the mode, reboot to initialize. (PnP mode <-> Manual Setup Mode)
•Power off : If the power is off, the first alarm is generated. After checking the checkbox, if the <Apply> button
is pressed, all event alarms that are set to the first alarm output are released, and then the first alarm cannot
be selected by other alarm output.
`` If that function is set, the first alarm-out checkbox and all alarms in the alarm setup screen are deactivated, to Off.
want to initialize the <Authority Setting>, you need to reset the password.
MM `` IfInyou
case you reboot, reset it the Installation Wizard and if not, use the guide screen to reset it.
English _67
● Menu Setup
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  <System>  ►▼  <System Management> 
[ENTER]  ▼►  <Settings>  [ENTER]  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
menu setup
Log Information
You can browse logs on the system and events.
Checking the system log
System Log shows log and timestamp on every system start up, system shutdown, and changes on system
settings.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  <System>  ►▼  <Log Information>  [ENTER]
 ▼  <System Log>  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
•Search Day : Click the Calendar icon to display the calendar window, or use the direction buttons to specify
the search period of the system log.
`` For using the calendar, refer to "To use the calendar". (Page 60)
•Search : Specify the date and press this button to display the search result in the log list.
•Type : When there are too many logs, you can display logs of the desired format by selecting the type.
•Export : Save all the logged information recorded in the NVR into the storage media.
68_ menu setup
Checking the event log
You can search recorded events including alarms, camera events and video loss.
It also shows the log and its timestamp.
•Search Day : Click the Calendar icon to display the calendar window, or use the direction buttons to specify
the search period of the system log.
`` For using the calendar, refer to "To use the calendar". (Page 60)
•Search : Specify the date and press this button to display the search result in the log list.
•Type : When there are too many logs, you can display logs of the desired format by selecting the type.
•Export : Save all the logged information recorded in the NVR into the storage media.
Checking the backup log
You can find out who backed up and the details (backup time, channel, device to use, file format, etc.).
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  <System>  ►▼  <Log Information>  [ENTER]
 ▼►  <Backup Log>  [ENTER]  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
•Search Day : Click the Calendar icon to display the calendar window, or use the direction buttons to specify
the search period of the system log.
`` For using the calendar, refer to "To use the calendar". (Page 60)
•Search : Specify the date and press this button to display the search result in the log list.
English _69
● Menu Setup
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  <System>  ►▼  <Log Information>  [ENTER]
 ▼►  <Event Log>  [ENTER]  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
menu setup
Setting the Device
You can setup Camera, Storage Device and Monitor.
Camera
To register a camera
You can register a network camera for each channel and make connection between.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Device>  ►  <Camera>  [ENTER]  ▼
 <Cam Registration>  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
•Preview : View the video of the channel as a current image.
•Protocol : Show the protocol information of a registered network camera.
•Model : Show the camera model name.
•IP Address : Display the IP address of a network camera.
•Connection : Display the connection status.
•Data Rate : Displays the total amount of data received by the channel.
•PoE Status : Displays connected PoE status information.
•ONVIF Setup : You can additionally set up ONVIF protocol camera.
•Error code guides : You can check the details of generated error codes.
NVR has been initialized, it may not connect to cameras. Configure the network settings first and add cameras.
MM `` IfForthemore
information on network settings, refer to "Network Configuration". (Page 97)
70_ menu setup
If you want to register a camera in PnP mode
● Menu Setup
JJ `` When you connect a camera in PnP mode, the initial ID, password and DHCP mode should be set in advance.
`` Samsung cameras are registered for Samsung protocols and other cameras are registered by using the Onvif protocol.
`` In PnP mode, you cannot connect a device that runs the DHCP server in PoE port or camera setting port. (Ex: hub)
To auto-search for and register a network camera
1. In the <Cam Registration> field, click on the <Auto> button.
2. Search for a network camera connected.
`` An already registered camera will be marked in blue in the list.
`` If you search for the camera again or if the IP is an old IP that was not assigned by the DHCP server (such as -192.168.1.100),
then press the <
the IP manually.
> button to check if a new IP has been assigned. If the IP is still the same, then select Assign IP to assign
3. Select a camera from the camera list to see a preview of its current video feed.
`` Camera searched with ONVIF does not provide previews.
English _71
menu setup
4. Check the checkbox next to a network camera that you want to connect to.
`` You can select all of the network cameras in the list and provide <ID> and <Password> all at once.
`` Click a header at the top of the list to sort the list according to that header.
JJ `` Registering camera with user account other than admin may restrict camera function.
`` When you change the camera ID/password in the camera web viewer, if the camera is already registered in NVR, you also
have to change the camera ID/passowrd information registered in NVR.
5. Click on the <ID/PW> button to enter the selected network camera's <ID> and <Password>.
6. Press the <Connection Test> button to make a connection to a camera.
7. Press <OK> to register the selected camera.
To manually search for and register a network camera
1. In the <Register> menu, click on the <Manual> button.
2. The manual search window will appear.
3. Select a channel and protocol used to connect to a camera.
The input items may differ depending on the selected protocol.
•SAMSUNG : Comply with the internal network protocols adopted by Samsung Techwin.
•ONVIF : Means the camera supports ONVIF protocols. When connecting a camera that its name cannot be
found from the list, select <ONVIF>.
•RTSP : Comply with RFC 2326, one of "Real Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP)" for real-time streaming.
72_ menu setup
4. If you select the <SAMSUNG> protocol, check options as necessary.
•Model : Select a camera model.
`` However, you must select the correct model name of the camera, if it's in the list. Some of obsolete camera models may not be
supported.
`` The below models are discontinued. If you register them with ONVIF, some camera functions will be restricted or cause errors.
It is recommended you register the Samsung protocol.
- SNB-2000, SNB-3000, SNC-B2315, SNC-B2331, SNC-B2335, SNC-B5368, SNC-B5395, SNC-B5399, SNC-570,
SNC-1300, SND-460V, SND-560, SND-3080, SND-3080C, SND-3080CF, SND-3080F, SND-3081, SNP-3301, SNP-3301H,
SNP-3350, SNP-3370, SNP-3370TH, SNP-3750, SNV-3080, SNP-3430
•Address type : Select an address type of the camera.
`` Address type can be different dependingon connected product model.
-- Static(IPv4)/Static(IPv6) : Used to provide the IP address of the camera manually.
-- iPOLiS DDNS : This is available only if the camera is registered with the iPOLiS DDNS(www.samsungipolis.
com) server. Provide the registered domain for DDNS ID.
`` Ex) http://www.samsungipolis.com/snb5000 ; provide "snb5000" for iPOLiS DDNS
-- URL : Used for URL address input.
MM `` Refer to the user manual of the connected camera and check the DDNS specification that is supported by the camera.
•IP Address : Provide the IP address of the camera.
•Device Port : Provide the device port of the camera.
•HTTP Port : Provide the HTTP port of the camera.
•ID : Provide the ID of the camera that you want to register.
•Password : Enter the password of the camera to be registered.
5. Select <ONVIF> or <RTSP> for the protocol and enter your input for each field appears.
•ONVIF Address / RTSP URL : Enter the camera's RTSP access address that supports ONVIF or RTSP.
For more information about the RTSP address, refer to the manual of each applicable network camera.
•ID : Enter the ID for accessing via ONVIF/RTSP protocol.
•Password : Enter the password for accessing via ONVIF/RTSP protocol.
•Mode : If <More Detail> button clicked, setup window will appear. Select a mode that is supported by the
network camera in RTSP connection mode.
-- TCP : The connection type with the network camera will switch to "RTP over TCP".
-- UDP : The connection type with the network camera will switch to "RTP over UDP".
-- HTTP : The connection type with the network camera will switch to "RTP over TCP (HTTP)".
-- HTTPS : The connection type with the network camera will switch to "RTP over TCP (HTTPS)".
English _73
● Menu Setup
-- Samsung Network Camera/Encoder : Means the camera/encoder supports Samsung Techwin's SVNP
protocol. When connecting a camera that does not appear in the camera list, select Samsung Netowrk
Camera/Encoder.
menu setup
If you want to check the error details of camera registration
If you failed to register a camera, the reason for the failure will be displayed.
•Connection failed due to unknown error. : This message appears if the camera has failed to be registered
due to unknown connection status.
•Due to the camera account locking, access has failed. : When you enter a wrong ID/password 5 times to
login to the camera account, this message is displayed.
Try to log in again after 30 seconds. If the same message appears, you may need to check whether someone
has tried to access your camera account from the outside.
•Connected successfully. : This message appears if the camera is connected successfully.
•Incorrect model information. Provide the correct model information. : This message appears if the
model information provided for registering the camera is incorrect.
•Authentication has failed : This message appears if the ID or password provided for registering the camera
is incorrect.
•Connection has failed due to excessive concurrent users. : This message appears if the concurrent user
count exceeds the upper limit.
•Connection has failed due to incorrect HTTP port information. : This message appears if the HTTP port
number of the camera is invalid.
•Connection has failed. Unknown connection status. : This message appears if the camera has failed to
be connected due to a unknown error.
•User Model Modification : When registering a new camera, it is named according to the device's default if
user set the model to <Samsung Network Camera/Encoder>. In case if automatic registration fails, user
can change the model name of camera to be registered.
To edit camera profile
When a camera is added for the first time, it is added as the default profile of H.264, MJPEG in order
temporarily.
To change its profile, refer to "Setting the camera recording profile" (Page 91) or "Live Setting" (Page 81).
case of NVR, if you set 3 different profiles for live, recording and network profile, one camera will produce video streams
MM `` Inaccordingly,
having different stream formats. Especially, note that the live profile may vary depending on the used screen split mode.
`` For cameras, if applied with one profile only, the produced frame rate is fixed as the profile specifies; if applied with multiple
profiles, produced video stream's frame rate is not guaranteed. For example, if applied with 2 profiles of 30fps, the camera
may transmit streams at 20fps.
74_ menu setup
ONVIF Setup
In the bottom of the camera addition screen, click on the <ONVIF Setup> button to set additional settings for
cameras with the ONVIF protocol.
`` You can change the information only if the user account (camera account used for camera registration) is used to read the user
● Menu Setup
information and a connection is made with the admin privilege.
Profile
• CH : It shows the list of registered camera with the ONVIF setting.
• Add Profile : You can add camera profile.
After adding a profile, click on the <OK> button to add it to the list.
• Delete : After selecting the profile to delete, click on the <Delete> button to delete the selected profile.
• Profile information : You can set the details of the selected profile.
After finishing setting each item, click on the <OK> button to save changes.
User
• Add User : You can add a camera user.
After adding a user, click on the <OK> button to add them to the list.
• Delete : After selecting the user to delete, click on the <Delete> button to delete the selected user.
• User Information : You can set the details of the selected user.
English _75
menu setup
Network
You can set the details of the network.
• IP Type : Select from either the IPv4/IPv6 IP types.
• DHCP : Select whether to use the DHCP.
• DNS / NTP Server : Only if the DHCP setting is <ON>, the DHCP checkbox will be activated.
`` If the DHCP is checked, you can not manually enter the IP address.
Relay
You can set details of the relay.
• Digital Output : You can select a digital output channel.
• Relay Mode : Select either bi or mono stable modes.
• Relay Idle State : Select either open or closed relay standby modes.
• Delay Time : Select the relay operation waiting time.
76_ menu setup
Event
You can set details of the event.
● Menu Setup
• Available events (camera) : It shows the list of all the events supported by a camera by using the ONVIF
protocol.
• NVR supported events : You can map the list of events supported by a camera to events that the NVR can
detect. There is no default value. It only shows the value sent by a camera.
Camera Setting
You can change the video settings of a registered network camera for each channel.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Device>  ►  <Camera>  [ENTER]  ▼►
 <Camera Setup>  [ENTER]  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
•Add : You can add camera profile. Click on the Add button to launch the addition window.
Enter the information and click on the <OK> button to add it to the list.
•Delete : You can delete the selected profile from the list.
•Select Camera : Select the camera channel to change the video transmission settings.
•Profile : Show a video profile for the connected camera.
•Codec : Show the codec information for the selected profile.
•Resolution : You can change the resolution of the selected profile.
•Frame Rate : You can change the frame rate of the selected profile.
•Quality : You can change the video quality of the selected profile.
•Bitrate Control : You can change the bit rate for video transmission of the selected profile.
English _77
menu setup
you change the settings of a specific profile for each model, the effective range of the baud rate may be changed
MM `` Ifaccordingly.
Ex) if you set the frame rate of the first profile to 30fps, the send rate of the second profile will be changed to 15fps.
`` Menu items except Codec, Resolution, Transfer Rate, and Transfer Quality can be configured in the network camera's
settings menu.
`` If you change the current profile settings, you may encounter an interrupted playback on the recording or live screen for a
certain time.
`` Changes made in Camera Setup page are applied immediately, while changes made through the camera's web page may
require up to 3 minutes.
Setup
In the bottom of the camera setting screen, press the <Setup> button to set your camera while watching the
live video of the selected camera.
(Samsung Unified Network API) : Camera that supports the communication protocols provided by Samsung
MM `` SUNAPI
1. Camera supporting SUNAPI.
2. A camera connected with admin privileges.
3. A camera connected to Samsung protocols.
In the above cases, you can use the function.
`` For more details on camera settings, refer to the camera user manual.
Settings and operational spec vary depending on each camera.
SSDR
If there is a significant difference between the dark and the bright areas, increase the brightness of the dark
areas to maintain the level of brightness of the entire area.
Mode, level, D-Range can be set.
Backlight
You can view both bright and dark areas.
Mode, WDR level, WDR black/white levels can be set.
78_ menu setup
Exposure
You can adjust the exposure of your camera.
Brightness control, shutter, SSNR, Sens-up, shutter/lens, and gains can be set.
● Menu Setup
Day/Night
You can change the mode to adjust the color and contrast.
Mode, switching time, brightness change, alarm time, alarm input/output, negative color, daytime/nighttime
switching and simple focus, and activation time can be set.
Special
DIS (shaking compensation), use of Defog levels can be set.
English _79
menu setup
Focus
You can adjust the focus of you camera's video.
Items of Simple Focus and Focus-Initialize Setting can be set.
Flip
You can set the mirror mode (horizontal flipping) and the flip mode (vertical flipping).
After finishing with setting camera, click on the <Close> button to move back to the previous screen.
80_ menu setup
Live Setting
You can change the live transfer settings of the network camera.
•Live Replacement : You can select the live profile setup mode.
If you select <Manual>, the profile setup items are enabled, and you can change settings manually.
-- Auto : For live monitoring, the profile which is approximate to the output resolution of each channel must be
selected automatically.
e.g., Camera profile : Three profiles (1280x720, 800x600 and 640x480) are supported.
If the resolution of the output screen is 1920x1080:
1280x720 is selected automatically if the channel resolution of the single channel is 1920x1080.
640x480 is selected automatically if the channel resolution of 16-split channel is 480x270.
-- Manual : Live monitoring is performed with the profile selected by the user from the registered camera
profiles.
-- Record : Live monitoring is performed with the profile set for recording.
•Profile : You can select the video profile of the connected camera setting.
•Codec : Show the codec of the selected recording profile.
•Resolution : Show the resolution of the selected profile.
•Frame Rate : Show the frame rate of the selected profile.
•Quality : Show the quality of transfer video of the selected profile.
English _81
● Menu Setup
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Device>  ►  <Camera>  [ENTER]  ▼►
 <Live Setup>  [ENTER]  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
menu setup
Channel Setting
You can configure the video settings for each channel.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Device>  ►  <Camera>  [ENTER]  ▼►
 <Channel Setup>  [ENTER]  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
• Apply to CH : If you select <Apply to CH>, the "Apply to CH" confirmation window will appear.
After selecting channels that the settings will be applied to, click on <OK> to apply them to the selected
channels.
•Video
-- <ON/OFF> : You can turn ON/OFF the selected channel's camera.
-- <Covert1> : Shows information other than the video of the selected channel.
For privacy protection, it does not display the video while the recording continues.
-- <Covert2> : Shows nothing but an empty screen while the recording continues.
the channel is set to <Covert1> or <Covert2> mode, the channel's sound is not hearable.
MM `` IfHowever,
the channel's sound is recorded if its Audio setting is set to <ON>, even the sound is not heard in Live mode.
•Audio
-- If set to <ON>, you can turn the audio of the channel ON/OFF on the Live screen.
-- If set to <OFF>, the channel's audio is off on the Live screen and not recorded.
•Camera Name : Provide a camera Name.
`` You can enter up to 15 characters including space.
82_ menu setup
Storage Device
You can check information on storage devices.
You can check storage devices and their capacity, usage as well as status.
Devices available are HDD, and USB devices (Memory, HDD).
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Device>  ►▼  <Storage Device> 
[ENTER]  ▼  <Device/Format>  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
• Storage Status : Displays the working status of a storage device.
-- Red : Displays the situation of video loss.
-- Green : Displays the normal situation without video recording losses.
-- Status
`` Full BPS : Displays the current rate of recording.
`` Current Loss Rate : Displays the current recording loss rate.
`` Max Loss Amount : Displays the maximum amount of losses up until now.
• No. : You can check the designated number for the built-in HDD.
`` If you want the find out about the location corresponding to the HDD number, refer to the <HDD Map>.
• Capacity : Displays the amount of storage device use and the full capacity.
• Usage : Designate the purpose of use for a storage device.
• Status : Displays the current working condition of a storage device.
For inspection or replacement of HDD alarms, please refer to "HDD Alarm Setting." (Page 84)
-- Normal : It is displayed during normal operation.
-- Inspection : Operating with partial problems.
-- Replacement : It is displayed when you can no longer use it.
• Temperature : You can check the temperature of the HDD mounted in the NVR.
English _83
● Menu Setup
Device/Format
menu setup
• Format : Select a device and click on format after which a format confirmation window appears.
Click on the <OK> button to format the selected storage device.
JJ `` Formatting will delete all the recording data that has been saved. Be careful.
`` While formatting is ongoing, you cannot record video.
`` Do not remove a formatting device until it is finished.
• HDD Map : You can check the location according to the assigned number for the HDDs installed inside.
`` Refer to this when servicing or installing an additional HDD.
HDD Alarm Setting
You can set the inspection alarm output terminal, the replacement alarm output terminal and the alarm time for
HDD defects.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Device>  ►▼  <Storage Device> 
[ENTER]  ▼►  <HDD Alarm>  [ENTER]  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
•Alarm
-- If <All> was selected, both beep sound and alarm signal through rear side ports will output.
-- If <BEEP> was selected, a beep will sound.
-- Alarm signal will output through the alarm out port on the rear side when selected <1>, <2>, <3> and <4>.
`` SRN-473S only supports <1> alarm, and SRN-873S only supports <1>, <2>, and <3> alarms.
•Check Alarm Output Port : If HDD generates check alarm, the alarm signal will output to the specified alarm
output port.
•Replace Alarm Output Port : If HDD generates replace alarm, the alarm signal will output to the specified
alarm output port.
•Duration : Sets the alarm duration for the alarm signal and beep sound.
status means that the HDD is operating but it has problems that require technical examination.
MM `` <Check>
(
) appears on the Live screen.
`` <Replace> status means that the HDD has defect and requires immediate replacement.
(
84_ menu setup
) appears on the Live screen.
Remote Devices
You can adjust the ID for a remote control to be used in connection with NVR.
• Remote control: Select whether to use a remote control.
• ID: Select an ID number linked to a camera.
If the remote control ID does not match, it will not operate properly.
MM `` To change the remote control ID, refer to "Changing the Remote Control ID". (Page 16)
Monitor
You can set the information displayed on the monitor as well as the output system.
Monitor settings
You can configure the monitor output-related settings including the displayed information, dwell time and output
system.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Device>  ►▼  <Monitor>  ▲▼◄► 
[ENTER]
•Event Display : Sets the dwell time of the event channel display on the monitor when an event occurs.
If you set it to <Continuous>, it will continue to display, until you press the [ALARM] button to cancel it.
•Display : Displays only checked items on the monitor screen.
•Sequence switching time : Set the automatic switching time for the segmented screen in live mode.
English _85
● Menu Setup
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Device>  ►▼  <Remote Device> 
[ENTER]  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
menu setup
•Video Output : Select a video output type from <HDMI> and <VGA>.
If your selection of <HDMI> or <VGA> does not match with the monitor setting, the video may not be output.
If you press the [STOP (@)]  [ZOOM]  [STOP (@)]  [ZOOM]  [MENU] button on your remote control,
the basic resolution pop up will appear. You can adjust the desired resolution in it.
`` If the changed resolution is not supported by the monitor, the video may not be displayed properly. If this is the case, the screen
will restore the default resolution after a certain time. Then, you can change it to a different resolution.
MM `` Specify the event display time and dwell time in consideration of the video delay depending on the network environment.
To adjust the display position
Some monitors many not display information (camera name, icon, time information, etc.) about the NVR,
depending on the condition. Then, you can change the display position of the data.
FULL
NO
1. From the monitor setup menu, select <Display Position Setup>.
2. Using the directional key or number button on the remote control, you can adjust the screen.
3. Press <OK>.
86_ menu setup
Text
Device and events can be set up.
Relevant values of a device connected to NVR can be set.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Device>  ►▼  <Text>  [ENTER]  ▼ 
<Device>  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
• Device : Enter the user's desired name
• Use : Select whether or not to use
• CH : Select a channel to add a device from a channel table.
• Port : Display a port number that is set
• Encoding type : Select an encoding type to use from a list.
-- You can select starting and ending character strings.
MM `` General characters, special characters, and Hex codes (e.g. 0x12, 0x34) can be used for character strings.
JJ `` Equipment connected to NVR uses TCP/IP communication protocol.
English _87
● Menu Setup
Device Settings
menu setup
Event Settings
You can set up event keywords.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Device>  ►▼  <Text>  [ENTER]  ▼ ►
<Event>  [ENTER]  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
• Total amount : Set a total amount condition to receive alarms.
• Keyword : If the <Add> button is clicked, a screen to add keywords pops up. If you select one of the added
keywords to delete and click the <Delete> button, the selected keyword will be deleted.
88_ menu setup
Setting the Recording
You can setup scheduled recording, event recording and other recording related settings.
Make your reservation on a date and time to schedule the recording on specified time.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Record>  ►  <Recording Schedule> 
[ENTER]  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
•All : The entire time range (Monday through Sunday including holidays, AM 0~ PM 23) will be reserved with
the same recording schedule
•Apply to CH : If you select <Apply to CH>, the "Apply to CH" confirmation pop-up window will appear.
After selecting channels that the settings will be applied to, click on <OK> to apply them to the selected
channels.
Record setting by the color
Color
Function
Description
No Color
No Recording
No schedule / event recording
Orange
Event
Event recording only
Green
White
Continuous
Both(Cont&Evnt)
Scheduled recording only
Both scheduled / event recordings
Each press of a selected cell will cycle through <No Recording>-<Continuous>-<Event>-<Both(Cont&Evnt)>.
English _89
● Menu Setup
Recording Schedule
menu setup
Record Setting
You can set resolution, IPS, and quality of recordings by channel, and by recording type of standard / event.
You can check frame rates and data transfer amount of Full Frame and Key Frame recordings for each channel,
and set the transfer limit for recordings.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Record>  ►▼  <Record Setup> 
[ENTER]  ▼  <NVR>  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
•Apply to CH : If you select <Apply to CH>, the "Apply to CH" confirmation window will appear.
After selecting channels that the settings will be applied to, click on <OK> to apply them to the selected
channels.
•Standard, Event : Configures Standard recording and Event recording.
-- FULL : Records all frames fed by the camera.
-- KEY : Records only key frames fed by the camera.
Actual recording rate may differ from camera settings. In general, 1 to 2 frames per second are recorded.
-- OFF : No recording is made.
• Frame
-- FULL : Shows the data amount (frames) of 'Record all scenes'.
-- KEY : Shows the data amount (frames) of 'Record important scenes'.
• Limit : Set the amount of data allowed for input for each channel.
• Event : When an event occurs, you can set which point you will start or stop recording.
-- Pre : When an event occurs, recording will be started regardless of the time set.
If you set it to five seconds, recording will start at five seconds before an event occurs.
-- Post : When an event occurs, recording will continue after the time set.
If you set it to five seconds, recording will continue for a further five seconds after an event is finished.
• Audio : Specify whether to record the sound received from the camera or not.
a channel's data transfer exceeds defined allowed limit, then it may affect to other channels, and may force switching to
MM `` If<KEY>
recording even when the channel is configured to <FULL> recording mode. For Key Frame recording channels, the
icon for limited recording appears on the live screen's top side.
`` A channel displayed in yellow indicates that the recorded data is not being transferred from the camera and that the recording
is being performed temporarily using another profile on the camera.
Check the channel information to see the applied profile to the channel listed in yellow.
A channel displayed in orange indicates that the amount of inputted data is greater than the permitted data amount.
In this case, it is impossible to record all of the incoming frames.
Instead, only part of the frames (1 or 2 frames per second) can be recorded. To resolve this issue, you must set the permitted
data amount to be greater than the amount of inputted data.
Refer to notes on "Record status". (Page 48)
90_ menu setup
Setting the camera recording profile
You can set the video profile to perform recording on your camera connected to each channel.
MM `` You can configure the settings only for the profiles that are supported by the camera.
`` If the profiles used for recording and network are different, camera's video feed may not comply with the frame rate as
specified in the camera.
•Profile : Select a record profile for the connected camera.
•Codec : Show the codec information for the selected record profile.
•Resolution : Display the resolution for the selected record profile.
•Frame Rate : Display the frame rate for the selected record profile.
•Quality : Display the video quality for the selected record profile.
English _91
● Menu Setup
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Record>  ►▼  <Record Setup> 
[ENTER]  ▼►  <Camera>  [ENTER]  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
menu setup
Record Option
When the HDD capacity is full, you can set whether to stop recording or start overwriting.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Record>  ►▼  <Record Option> 
[ENTER]  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
•Disk End Mode : Select a HDD repetitive recording type.
-- Overwrite : If the HDD is full, this will overwrite the existing data and keep recording.
-- Stop : If the HDD is full, this will stop recording automatically.
•Disk End Beep : If you select <Stop> for the disk end mode, this button will be active. Specify the use of
beep when the HDD recording ends.
If you check it, the beep will sound on the disk full and the recording stops.
•Auto Delete : If you check this option, the period list box is active. Specify the deletion period to delete any
earlier data than the specified date. However, you can search for data from the current time to the selected
date.
you press <OK> when you have completed your settings, all the existing data earlier than the specified period will be
JJ `` Ifdeleted
automatically. So it is recommend to backup the previous data if necessary for later use.
92_ menu setup
Setting the Event
You can make the setup for record in case of sensor detection, camera event or video loss detection.
You can set the sensor's operating condition and connected camera, as well as alarm output and its duration.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Event>  ►  <Sensor Detection> 
[ENTER]  ▼  <NVR>  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
•Apply to other sensors : If you select <Apply to other sensors>, the "Apply to other sensors" confirmation
window will appear.
After selecting channels that the settings will be applied to, click on <OK> to apply them to the selected
channels.
•Sensor Operation : Sets the operation mode of sensors.
`` In the <Camera> tab, you can set whether or not to use a sensor.
-- <N.O (Normal Open)> : Sensor is opened. If the sensor is closed, it generates alarm.
-- <N.C (Normal Close)> : Sensor is closed. If the sensor is open, it generates alarm.
•Cam : Select a channel to be connected to the sensor.
If selected camera, "Cam Preset setup" window appears.
Select a channel and setup the preset.
`` Preset setup can be done in PTZ mode.
•Alarm out : Sets the alarm output method.
`` For further information on alarm output, refer to "HDD Alarm > Alarm". (Page 84)
`` SRN-473S only supports <1> alarm, and SRN-873S only supports <1>, <2>, and <3> alarms.
•Duration : Sets the duration of alarm signal and alarm sound.
select <Camera> tab, you can configure the sensor operation settings of the network camera connected to each channel.
MM ```` IfIf you
the connected network camera that has configured the alarm in/out settings triggers an alarm, NVR will perform the alarm out.
English _93
● Menu Setup
Sensor Detection
menu setup
Camera Event
You can specify operation of events sent from your camera (motion detection, video analysis events, audio
events), alarm display methods, and alarm time.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Event>  ►▼  <Camera Event>  [ENTER]
 ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
• Apply to CH : If you select <Apply to CH>, the "Apply to CH" confirmation window will appear.
After selecting channels that the settings will be applied to, click on <OK> to apply them to the selected
channels.
• Camera Event : Select whether or not to use a camera event.
• MD : Select whether or not to use motion detection from camera.
• Cam : Select an event detection channel.
If you select a camera item, the "Camera preset" screen will appear. Select a channel to connect and set the
preset.
`` You can set the preset in PTZ mode.
• Alarm : Select the method for alarm output.
`` For more details, refer to "HDD alarm > Alarm". (Page 84)
• Alarm Duration : Set the duration of alarm.
• Camera MD : You can set the detailed setting of motion detection for a network camera connected.
-- Mode : Set the motion detection mode.
-- Area : Click on <Setup> and when the detailed setup menu appears, set the motion detection area.
-- Sensitivity : Set the sensitivity for motion detection. (very low/low//medium/high/very high).
-- Size : Click on <Setup>. When the detailed setup menu appears, set the max/min size of the object to be
detected.
-- Activation Time : Select the operation time of motion detection.
After finishing with setup, click on the <OK> button to move back to the previous screen after saving the setup.
94_ menu setup
Video Loss Detection
You can set the camera so that the camera can trigger the alarm if it is disconnected or the video is lost due to
unstable network connection.
• Apply to CH : If you select <Apply to CH>, the "Apply to CH" confirmation window will appear.
After selecting channels that the settings will be applied to, click on <OK> to apply them to the selected
channels.
•Video Loss State : Specify the use of video loss detection.
•Alarm Out : Select an alarm output method.
`` For further information on alarm output, refer to "HDD Alarm > Alarm". (Page 84)
`` SRN-473S only supports <1> alarm, and SRN-873S only supports <1>, <2>, and <3> alarms.
•Alarm Duration : Specify the duration of the alarm output with the beep.
English _95
● Menu Setup
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Event>  ►▼  <Video Loss Detection> 
[ENTER]  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
menu setup
Alarm Out Schedule
You can set the conditions and operating hours for scheduled alarms.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Event>  ►▼  <Alarm Out Schedule> 
[ENTER]  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
•Alarm Out : Sets the alarm output method.
`` For further information on alarm output, refer to "HDD Alarm > Alarm". (Page 84)
-- <ON> : Marked in green, and always generates alarm on scheduled time.
-- <OFF> : Marked in black, no alarm is generated even if an event occurs.
-- <Event Sync> : Marked in orange, generates alarm only when an event occurs.
•Apply to All Alarm out : Applies the configured schedule to all alarms.
MM `` When the alarm is generated on the scheduled time, you can stop the alarm by canceling the schedule.
96_ menu setup
Network Configuration
It provides networked monitoring of Live screen from a remote place, and supports mail forwarding function with
events. You can configure the network environment which enables such functions.
● Menu Setup
Interface
You can set the network connection route and protocol.
Setting a network connection
Sets the protocol and environment of the network.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Network>  ►  <Interface>  [ENTER]  ▼
 <Network>  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
• Network1 (Camera) : Port for camera connections; it receives video from a camera.
• Network2 (Viewer) : Port used to send video to the web viewer.
• Network1 (Camera) / Network2 (Viewer) setup
-- IP Type : Select a network connection type.
-- IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, DNS
<Static> : You can manually enter IP address, subnet mask, gateway and DNS.
<DHCP> : IP address, subnet mask and gateway values will be automatically set.
<PPPoE> : IP address, subnet mask and gateway values will be automatically set.
-- User ID, Password : If you set the connection mode to PPPoE, you need to enter "User ID" and
"Password" to register in PPPoE.
• Transfer bandwidth : Enter the maximum amount of upload data bandwidth.
Check the assigned setting in Connection Mode before entering your value.
`` If the sum of the network TX/RX is less than 160Mbps, there is a max transmission rate of 160Mbps.
• Default Gateway : Set the basic gateway by using Network1 / Network2 setup.
MM `` You can manually input DNS of <DHCP> and <PPPoE> when it selected to <Manual>.
English _97
menu setup
Connecting and Setting the Network
Networking may differ from the connection method, check your environment before setting the connection
mode.
When no router is used
•Static IP mode
-- Internet connection : Static IP, leased line, and LAN environments allows connection between the NVR and
remote user.
-- NVR Network Settings : Set the <Network> in <Interface> menu of the connected NVR to <Static>.
`` Consult your network manager for IP, Gateway and Subnet Mask.
•DHCP mode
-- Internet connection : Connect the NVR directly to a cable modem, DHCP ADSL modem or FTTH network.
-- NVR Network Settings : Set the <Network> in <Interface> menu of the connected NVR to <DHCP>.
•PPPoE
-- Internet connection : An PPPoE modem is directly connected to the NVR, where the PPPoE connection
requires user ID and password.
-- NVR Network Settings : Set the <Network> in <Interface> menu of the connected NVR to <PPPoE>.
`` PPPoE <User ID> and <Password> should be the same to the PPPoE user information.
If you don't know the ID and password, consult your PPPoE service provider.
98_ menu setup
When a router is used
JJ `` To avoid IP address conflict with the NVR's static IP, check followings :
-- Internet connection : You can connect the NVR to a router which is connected to an PPPoE/Cable modem
or a router in a Local Area Network (LAN) environment.
•Setting the NVR Network
1. Set the <Network> in <IP Type> menu of the connected NVR to <Static>.
2. Check whether the set IP address is in the static IP range provided by the Broadband Router.
IP Address, Gateway, and Subnet Mask : Consult your network manager.
`` Check whether the set IP address is in the static IP range provided by the Broadband Router.
DHCP server is configured with starting address (192.168.0.100) and end address (192.168.0.200), you should set the
JJ `` IfIPaaddress
out of the configured DHCP range (192.168.0.2 ~ 192.168.0.99 and 192.168.0.201 ~ 192.168.0.254).
3. Check the Gateway address and subnet mask are equal to those set in the Broadband Router.
•Setting the DHCP IP Address of the Broadband Router
1. To access the Broadband Router's configurations, open a web browser on the local PC that is connected
to the Broadband Router and enter the router's address (ex : http://192.168.1.1).
2. At this stage, make the local PC's windows network configurations to the below example :
Ex) IP : 192.168.1.2
Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0
Gateway : 192.168.1.1
-- Once connected to the Broadband Router, it prompts with password. While entering nothing to the User
Name field, enter "admin" into the password field and press <OK> to access the router configurations.
-- Access the router's DHCP configuration menu and set its DHCP server activation, and provide the start
and end address.
Set the start address (192.168.0.100) and end address (192.168.0.200).
MM `` Above steps may differ from the router devices depending on the manufacturer.
English _99
● Menu Setup
•Setting the NVR with a static IP
menu setup
Port Setting
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Network>  ►  <Interface>  [ENTER] 
▼►  <Port>  [ENTER]  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
•Protocol Type : Select the protocol type among TCP, UDP - Unicast and UDP - Multicast.
•Device Port : Enter the connectable port number. Initially, <554> is set.
-- TCP : It has better stability and lower speed when compared to UDP, and recommended for internet
environments.
•UDP Port : Initially, <8000~8159> is set. It increases / decreases by 160.
-- UDP : It has less stability and faster speed when compared to TCP, and recommended for local area
network (LAN) environments.
•Multicast IP Address : User can directly input.
•Multicast TTL : Select from 0 ~ 255. Initial value for the TTL is set to <5>.
•HTTP Port : Enter the port number for the Web Viewer. Initially, it is set to <80>.
•Send SSL : Select this option to send SSL.
•Backup Bandwidth : Select the degree of backup bandwidth.
100_ menu setup
DDNS
If a remote user accesses the network, you can set whether or not to use DDNS and the site to be connected.
•DDNS Site : Specify the use of DDNS and select a site that you registered.
•Host Name : Provide the host name that you registered with the DDNS site.
•User Name : Provide the user ID that you registered with the DDNS Site.
•Password : Provide the password that you registered with the DDNS site.
MM `` Refer to "Using Virtual Keyboard". (Page 61)
`` If you select <OFF>, the input box will be inactive.
`` If you select <iPOLiS>, the host name input box will be inactive. The user name input box will be active.
•Quick Connect : Appears if the <samsungipolis.com> is selected for a <DDNS Site>.
To use the function, set to <Use> after connecting the NVR to a UPnP router.
MM `` If canceled during Quick Connect configuration, it automatically switches to <Not Use> and saved.
To check Quick Connect status
A progress bar and its message appears for a Quick Connect.
•Quick Connect Success : Message for a successful connection.
•Invalid Network Configuration : Message appears if the network configuration is not valid. Check the
configuration.
•Please enable UPnP function of the router : Message appears if the router requires UPnP function
enabled.
•Failed to find the router : Message appears if the router is not found. Check the router's configurations.
•Please restart the router : Message appears if the router should be restarted.
English _101
● Menu Setup
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Network>  ►▼  <DDNS>  [ENTER]  ▼
 <Network 1>  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
menu setup
DDNS Setting
DDNS is a short form of Dynamic Domain Naming System.
DNS (Domain Name System) is a service that routes a domain name consisting of user friendly characters (ex :
www.google.com) to an IP address consisting of numbers (64.233.189.104).
DDNS (Dynamic DNS) is a service that registers a domain name and the floating IP address with the DDNS
server so that the domain name can be routed to the IP address even if the IP is changed in a dynamic IP
system.
•Setting DDNS in the NVR
Set <Protocol Type> in the <Protocol> menu of the connected NVR to the following :
Ex) Protocol Type : TCP
Port (TCP) : 554, 555, 556, 557, 558
DDNS Site : iPOLiS
•DDNS Settings of the Router
Select the corresponding menu for the network transfer protocol of the router.
•Setting up UPnP of Router
Refer to the router's documentation to enable the UPnP function of the router.
IP Filtering
You can prepare the list of IP addresses to allow or block access to a specific IP address.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Network>  ►▼  <IP Filtering>  [ENTER]
 ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
• Filtering Type :
-- Deny : If you select reject, access to the registered IP address will be limited.
-- Allow : If you choose permit, then they can only access the registered IP addresses.
• Use : Select the checkbox for the IP address that will use IP filtering.
• IP Address : Enter the IP address for filtering.
• Filtering Range : If you enter an IP address or prefix, then the range of IP addresses blocked or permitted will
be displayed.
JJ `` If a camera's IP address is not included in the Permit list or is in the Reject list access to it will be rejected.
`` Camera IP filtering through PoE port is not applied to IPv4. (The existing connection is maintained, and filtering is applied to
subsequent connections.)
102_ menu setup
SSL
You can select a security connection system or install public certificates.
• Secured Connection System : You can select a type of security connection system.
-- HTTP (Non-secured connection)
-- HTTPS (Secured connection using unique certificate)
-- HTTPS (Secured connection using public certificate)
• Install Public Certificate : You can scan and register public certificates to be installed.
If you want to use a certificate, you need to install a certificate file along with and an encryption file.
`` The <HTTPS (Secured connection using public certificate)> menu can be selected only if there is a registered public
certificate.
802.1x
When connecting to a network, you can select whether to use the 802.1x protocol and install a corresponding
certificate.
802.1x is a certificate system for the server and the client. It can guarantee robust performance against hacking
into the Tx/Rx network data, virus or information leaks.
By using this system, you can block access from a client who is not certified and only allow communication to
certified users and thus increase the level of security.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Network>  ►▼  <802.1x>  [ENTER]  ▼
 <Network>  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
• EAPOL Version : Select the EAPOL version to be used as protocol.
`` Some switch hubs will not operate if you set them to version <2>. Select version <1>.
English _103
● Menu Setup
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Network>  ►▼  <SSL>  [ENTER] 
▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
menu setup
• ID : Enter the ID provided by the RADIUS server administrator.
`` If the entered ID does not match the ID of the client's certificate, it won't be processed properly.
• Password : Enter the password provided by the RADIUS server administrator.
`` If the password you entered does not match that of the client's private key, it won't be processed properly.
• Certificates : Search for a device. Click on <Rescan> to search for a device again.
• CA Certificate : Select this only if your public certificate includes the public key.
• Client Certificate : Select if the public certificate includes a client's authentication key.
• Client Private Key : Select it if the public certificate contains the client private key.
successful implementation of the 802.1x operating environment, the administrator must use the RADIUS server.
MM `` For
In addition, the switch hub connected to the server must be a device that supports 802.1x.
`` If the time setting of the RADIUS server, the switch hub and an NVR device do not match, communication between them can
fail.
`` If a password is assigned to the client's private key, the server administrator should confirm the ID and password.
The ID and password allow up to 30 characters each. (But it only supports letters, numbers and special characters ("-", "_",
"." 3 types) only.
Accessing non password-protected files is allowed without entering a password.
`` The 802.1x protocol adopted by the NVR is EAP-TLS.
`` You need to install all three certificates to use 802.1x.
Live Streaming Setting
You can configure the profile to transfer the live video of each channel via the network.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Network>  ►▼  <Live Streaming> 
[ENTER]  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
•Profile : Select a network profile for the connected camera.
•Codec : Show the codec information for the selected network profile.
•Resolution : Display the resolution for the selected network profile.
•Frame Rate : Display the baud rate for the selected network profile.
•Quality : Display the video quality for the selected network profile.
the profiles used for network and recording are different, camera's video feed may not comply with the frame rate as
MM `` Ifspecified
in the camera.
104_ menu setup
E-mail
You can send an e-mail to a NVR-registered user at a specific time interval, or if an event occurs.
SMTP Setting
Sets the SMTP mail server.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Network>  ►▼  <E-mail>  [ENTER]  ▼
 <SMTP>  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
•Server Address : Enter the SMTP server address to connect to.
•Port : Sets the communication port.
•Use Authentication : Check this if the SMTP server uses user authentication.
The account input box will be activated.
•ID : Enter a ID to use authentication when connecting to the SMTP server.
•Password : Enter the password of the SMTP server user.
•Secure Transfer : Select one from <Never> and <TLS (if available)>.
•Sender : Use the virtual keyboard to enter the sender's e-mail address.
`` Refer to "Using Virtual Keyboard". (Page 61)
•E-mail Test : Conducts the test on the server settings.
English _105
● Menu Setup
is set to <OFF> or the channel's event is Video Loss, a notification is sent to the designated email address
MM `` Ifonlytheincamera
text.
menu setup
Event Setting
You can set the interval and type of the event that will be sent to the user.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Network>  ►▼  <E-mail>  [ENTER] 
▼►  <Event>  [ENTER]  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
•Event Interval : Set the event interval.
`` If a series of events occurs, the e-mail will be sent at the specified interval, not on each event.
•Use Event Transfer : Select an event type to send if an event occurs.
If the selected event occurs, the e-mail will be sent to the group that has the recipient authority.
Recipient Setting
You can create a group and add users to it or; you can delete users and change a group.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Network>  ►▼  <E-mail>  [ENTER] 
▼►  <Recipient>  [ENTER]  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
• Click on <
> to add a group.
Select a group name and the privilege.
• Select a recipient group to receive emails.
If a group is added, it will appear in the group list.
• Click on <
> to add a recipient.
Select a group and enter names and email addresses.
If a group is created, you can add a recipient.
`` For inputting the recipient name and email address, refer to "Using Virtual Keyboard". (Page 61)
106_ menu setup
SNMP
Using the SNMP protocol, the system or network administrator can monitor the network devices remotely as
well as the operating environment.
• Enable SNMP v1 : SNMP version 1 is used.
• Enable SNMP v2 : SNMP version 2 is used.
-- Read Community : Enter the name of read-only community to access the SNMP information. By default it is
set to <private>.
-- Write Community : Enter the name of write-only community to access the SNMP information. By default, it
is set to <public>.
• Enable SNMP v3 : SNMP version 3 is used.
-- Password : Set the initial user password for SNMP version 3.
• Enable SNMP Traps : SNMP trap is used to send important events and conditions to the Admin System.
-- Trap Manager : Enter the IP address to which messages will be sent.
v3 can be set only if the security connection method is set to HTTPS mode.
JJ `` SNMP
Refer to "SSL" for more details. (Page 103)
English _107
● Menu Setup
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Network>  ►▼  <SNMP>  [ENTER] 
▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
menu setup
DHCP Server
You can set the internal DHCP server and assign an IP address to the network camera.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Network>  ►▼  <DHCP Server> 
[ENTER]  ▼  <Network>  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
Network Setting
•Network 1 (Camera) / Network 2 (Viewer) : Select <Setup>, and you can set the IP range operated by the
server and time.
To set the DHCP server
1. On the DHCP Server Setup window, click <Setup>.
2. Select <Run> in the <Status> field.
3. Enter the starting IP and end IP in the <IP Range> field.
4. Fill in the <IP Lease Time> field.
5. Click <OK>.
The IP range entered is set as the DHCP server address of the network.
Check IP
You can check the IP Address and Mac currently used through the DHCP server, and the connected network
port.
[MENU]  [ENTER]  ▼  <Menu>  [ENTER]  ▼  <Network>  ►▼  <DHCP Server> 
[ENTER]  ▼►  <Check IP>  [ENTER]  ▲▼◄►  [ENTER]
•Network : Select the network port to check the information on IP and others.
108_ menu setup
search & play
Search
You can perform the search for recorded data by the time or by the search criteria such as an event.
You can access the <Search> menu directly in Live mode.
● search & play
Scene Mode
►
CH Info
Live Status
Record Status
PoE Status
Layout
►
Audio Off
Freeze
Stop Alarm
Record
Keep full scr ratio
Play
Search
Backup
Menu
Quick Setup
►
Shutdown
Hide Launcher
Logout
1. In live mode, right click with the mouse button or press the [MENU] button on your remote control.
The Live menu appears.
2. Select <Search>.
Or press the [SEARCH] button on your remote control
3. The Search menu should appear.
4. The search can be restricted by the Auto Delete function.
Refer to "Setting the Recording > Record Option". (Page 92)
data : It only appears if there exists overlapped data on a certain time, produced due to the change of NVR's time
MM `` Overlapped
setup. The latest data comes first, from <List0>.
It does not appear in <Backup Search>.
`` The search time is based on the time specified by NVR.
Time Search
You can search for recorded data of a desired time.
The displayed time is based on the local time zone and the daylight saving time (DST). Therefore, data recorded
at the same time from different areas may differ based on the time zone and the DST.
1. Select <Time Search> in the <Search> menu.
2. In the date selection window, click on the < > > button to select a search date.
`` For using the calendar, refer to "To use the calendar". (Page 60)
English _109
search & play
3. The record data on the specific date will be listed.
The display bar is different according to the data type. So check the data type for the color in the left pane.
DST (Daylight Saving Time) is configured, overlapping multiple recordings may be produced for a certain moment of time.
MM `` IfSuch
a time section is distinguished with red color to mark DST section.
4. Using the directional button(▲▼◄►) on your remote control, you can set the search condition or press the
[ENTER] button.
•Go to First : Move to the earliest recording date.
•Go to Last : Move to the latest recording date.
•Time : Enter a time to perform the search or use the up/down button <>> to select one.
•Zoom In : The map enlarges in detail.
It will switch in the sequence of 24hours - 12 hours - 6 hours - 2hours - 1hour.
•Zoom Out : The map will switch in the reverse order of the detailed mode above.
It will switch in the sequence of 1hour - 2 hours - 6 hours - 12 hours - 24 hours.
•Preview : Click <Channel> and select (click, drag) a time in <Duration> to display a still image for the
portion.
-- If the selected channel does not contain any recorded data, it will be marked black.
5. Select a data item and click <Play>.
The screen switches to the data playback mode.
Color indications depending on current recording status
The recorded data types are represented through the use of different colors. Each color corresponds to a
certain recording type.
Event Search
You can search for events by the channel and play them.
1. Select <Event Search> in the <Search> menu.
2. Using the directional button(▲▼◄►) on your remote control, you can set the channel, the search date, and
the search condition and then press the [ENTER] button.
`` Depending on the menu selected, it will search for all/motion detection/video analysis/audio detection/sensors/standard/general
recording events.
•Date/Time Preview : If you select a data item in the list, the still image of the selected data will be displayed in
the left preview pane.
•Event : Displays the type of the event that occurred.
3. Select a data item and click <Play>.
The screen switches to the event data playback mode.
110_ search & play
Text Search
You can search data that was entered into POS systems connected to NVR.
● search & play
1. Select <Text Search> from the <Search> menu.
2. Use the up, down, left, and right (▲▼◄►) buttons to configure the search condition setup items, and press
the [ENTER] button.
`` A deeper and more detailed search can be performed by using specific characters.
• Search characters : Enter characters using a virtual keyboard.
• Event Keyword : Search using a condition set in the "Device > Text > Event settings" menu. (Page 88)
• Search Condition : Enter a word to search in the input screen and press the <Search> button.
-- <Case Sensitive> : If this option is checked, the search terms are case-sensitive.
-- <Whole Word> : If checked, only results that exactly match the input words will be displayed.
• Time overlap : This is displayed if there is data duplicated during a preset time interval.
• Preview screen : If data is selected from a list, a preview image is displayed.
All information is displayed in the text display below.
• Export : Stores all text search information recored in NVR to storage media.
3. Select data and <Play>.
Moves to a replay screen for searched text data.
English _111
search & play
Backup Search
Searches for backup data in the connected backup device.
Only data in the format of NVR is included in the search.
1. Select <Backup Search> in the <Search> menu.
2. Using the directional button(▲▼◄►) on your remote control, you can set the channel, the search date, and
the search condition and then press the [ENTER] button.
•Channel : Displays the recorded channel.
•Record Period : Displays the record period.
•Play Start Time : Select a time that you start playing.
3. Select a data item and click <Play>.
The screen switches to the backup data playback mode.
112_ search & play
Playback
Play
● search & play
You can play data stored in the HDD and backup a desired portion of the data.
Scene Mode
►
CH Info
Live Status
Record Status
PoE Status
Layout
►
Audio Off
Freeze
Stop Alarm
Record
Keep full scr ratio
Play
Search
Backup
Menu
Quick Setup
►
Shutdown
Hide Launcher
Logout
1. In the live menu screen, select <Play> menu or click on <
button on your remote control.
> in the launcher menu or press the [+]
2. Using the up/down(▲▼) button, select the search menu.
`` If this is the first time you try to play, you will start with the data search window.
For data search, refer to "Search". (Page 109)
3. Select a data item and click <Play> in the Search menu.
The selected data is played and the play launcher appears on the screen.
`` If there is an existing data, <Play> will start immediately without performing the search.
•Playback Information : Displays the date and time of the current data in the top corner.
•Backup : Click <
> to set the current time to the start time of backup; you can specify a backup area
using the mouse (yellow triangle).
Click <
> again to set the current time to the end time of the backup and the "Backup Range" window
appears.
-- Type : Supports formats of NVR and SEC.
`` You can select whether or not to "Text data included" for SEC format.
-- Device : Select a backup device.
-- Check Capacity : Enables you to check the capacity of the selected storage device.
4. If you want to return to the live screen while playing, click <
button on your remote control.
> on the launcher menu or press the [@]
English _113
search & play
Using the Playback Button
Name
a
b
c
Play Timeline
Skip Backward
Backward Fast
Play
Description
Indicates the current playback point, and can be used to move.
Moves backward by unit time.
Used for quick backward search while in Play.
d
e
f
g
h
Backward Slow Play
i
Forward Slow Play
j
k
l
m
n
Forward Fast Play
REC
Records all channels in Live mode.
o
ZOOM
This is available in Single mode, which will enlarge the video from a selected channel.
To cancel the zooming, simply double-click the enlarged image or select <Close Zoom> in the Live
screen menu.
p
Partial Backup
q
Mode Switch
Begins backup of the selected section of the video being played, with the specified starting/ending
point.
Step Backward
Pause
Stop
Step Forward
Skip Forward
Return
Audio
114_ search & play
Used for backward frame-by-frame search while in PAUSE.
Moves backward by one frame at a time.
Stops playing the current video temporarily.
Stops playback and moves to the live screen.
Moves forward by one frame at a time.
In a split mode, the real time playback may not be supported, depending on the record quality,
resolution and number of channels. And some frame rates may be supported.
Used for quick forward playback.
Moves forward by unit time.
Return to the search setup screen.
Sets Audio ON/OFF.
Click on the desired playing mode or press the [MODE] button to change the split mode.
starting web viewer
What is Web Viewer?
WebViewer is a software program with which the operator can access a remote NVR (Network Video Recorder) for
real-time monitoring, PTZ control (if configured) or search.
● starting web viewer
NETWORK
Network Camera
NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER
USB
NVR
NETWORK
Remote PC
Product Features
•Remote connection using the browser
•PTZ camera control enabled
•Supports 1, 4, 9, 16 camera viewing formats (maximum of 16 cameras in the list).
•Saving function in JPEG/BMP/PNG image format for printing and storage.
•Record video in AVI format-compatible with popular media players. (The integrated codec is needed)
•To play the video in Windows Media Player, you must download and install the relevant codec from www.
windows7codecs.com. (version 4.0.3 or higher)
System Requirements
The following lists the minimum suggested hardware and operating system requirements needed to run the
Web Viewer.
CPU
Item
RAM
HDD
VGA Memory
Display Resolution
OS
Network
Minimum
Recommended
Intel Core 2 Quad 2.5GHz or higher
Intel i7 (3.5GHz) or more
2GB or more
4GB or more
200GB or more
500GB or more
512MB or more
1GB or more
1280 x 1024 or higher
Window XP(service pack 2 or above), Vista, 7, 8, Mac OS X(10.6 or above)
OpenGL (GPU Accelerator supported)
Web browser Windows environment : Latest security patch, IE 8 or higher with bug patches
(IE 9 recommended), IE 10, Chrome 26.x or higher, FireFox 19.x version or higher
Mac OS X environment : Latest security patch, Safari 6.0.3 or higher with bug patches
10/100 Ethernet NIC
English _115
starting web viewer
Connecting Web Viewer
1. Open your web browser and type the IP address or URL of
NVR into the URL address box.
need to connect network 2 before you can access the web
MM `` You
viewer.
`` "192.168.2.200" is set to IP by default.
`` You must have specified the IP address in "Network > Interface".
`` The URL connection will be enabled only when the DDNS connection settings have been completed.
For more information, refer to "Network Configuration > DDNS". (Page 101)
2. A user with the admin permissions should provide the admin
ID and password. A registered user should provide the user
ID and password.
the ID and password for the web viewer are "admin"
JJ `` Byanddefault,
"4321", and these should be changed during the installation
wizard stage.
The installation wizard can only be used the first time the product is
used.
`` Set password for your wireless network if you use the product with a wireless router. Being not protected with password or
using the default wireless router password may expose your video data to potential threat.
`` Please change your password every three months to safely protect personal information and to prevent the damage of the
information theft.
Please, take note that it's a user's responsibility for the security and any other problems caused by mismanaging a
password.
MM `` It allows up to 10 simultaneous access including the Admin and general users.
`` Password of the Admin and general users can be changed in <User> menu of the NVR.
`` Normal users should have set <Webviewer> under <Restriction on Network Access> to Use before connecting to the
Web Viewer. (Page 63)
`` All settings are applied by the NVR's settings.
3. The plugin installation confirmation pop-up window will
appear.
116_ starting web viewer
4. When a program installation wizard window appears, press
the [Install] button to install the program.
`` The version of the program installed may vary depending on the update
version.
● starting web viewer
5. When program installation is complete, click on the [Finish]
button.
6. When installation is finished, and you are successfully logged
in, the live viewer main screen will appear.
CAM 01 - TEXT 01
CAM 02 - TEXT 01
CAM 03 - TEXT 01
CAM 04 - TEXT 01
CAM 05 - TEXT 01
CAM 06 - TEXT 01
CAM 07 - TEXT 01
CAM 08 - TEXT 01
CAM 09 - TEXT 01
CAM 10 - TEXT 01
CAM 11 - TEXT 01
CAM 12 - TEXT 01
CAM 13 - TEXT 01
CAM 14 - TEXT 01
CAM 15 - TEXT 01
CAM 16 - TEXT 01
If you want to access the web viewer with multiple browsers
Set auto execution of plugin (npNVRViewer) in the browser
menu that you first access and refresh the screen after
activating the plugin or selecting plugin reliability.
`` Each time the browser is upgraded in the future, the plugin activation
method can be changed. Plug in setting menu can be referred to in the
browser manual.
chrome browsers, "Plug in is not activated. Please select
JJ `` For
'Always run on this site' and refresh", then select the 'always
execute on this site' button in the top of the browser.
English _117
live viewer
Live Viewer
You can check the video from camera registered in the NVR connected from a remote PC. Also, you can adjust the
camera and check the network transfer status.
Live Viewer Screen
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
k
j
CAM 01 - TEXT 01
CAM 02 - TEXT 01
CAM 03 - TEXT 01
CAM 04 - TEXT 01
CAM 05 - TEXT 01
CAM 06 - TEXT 01
CAM 07 - TEXT 01
CAM 08 - TEXT 01
i
h
CAM 09 - TEXT 01
CAM 10 - TEXT 01
CAM 11 - TEXT 01
CAM 12 - TEXT 01
CAM 13 - TEXT 01
CAM 14 - TEXT 01
CAM 15 - TEXT 01
CAM 16 - TEXT 01
Menu
a
b
c
d
System Stauts
Indicator
Description
Displays icons to display the screen or system status.
Menu Selection
Switches into corresponding menu screen by clicking each menu.
Date/channel
Shows the access date/time and the selected channel.
Sound
Sets the sound connected to each channel to either ON/OFF.
Capture
Saves current video for the selected channel in the path designated by the user.
Print
Prints current video image for the selected channel through designated printer.
Keep ch. scr ratio
Changes screen ratio of the selected channel.
Keep full scr ratio
Changes screen ratio for all channels.
Channel change/full
screen
Switches to the previous/next channel group.
118_ live viewer
Switch from the full screen to the split screen.
Menu
Description
Shows the channel information selected.
Pause
Temporarily stops the videos in all the channels or deactivates the Pause function in
suspending status.
Stop Alarm
Deactivates an alarm when it occurs.
OSD
Check the OSD item to display the OSD screen information in the web viewer window.
PC recording
Saves the real-time video, in AVI format, from the selected channel in a designated folder on
the PC.
NVR recording
Start and stop NVR recording.
f
Save layout
Save layout.
g
Switching
Set the sequence.
h
PTZ
Controls connect PTZ camera(s).
i
Display Pane
Displays the video of camera connected to NVR.
Text
Turns text devices and data output located in the right side of Search ON/OFF.
ID
Display the ID of user connected.
Quick setup
Simple camera registration and recording settings.
Manual backup
Manually backup the video of the camera connected.
Status
Shows the camera live and recording status.
Help
Move to the help window.
Logout
Performs logout process.
Close
Turn off the NVR system.
e
j
k
English _119
● live viewer
Channel information
live viewer
Live Screen Configuration
System Status
You can check the status or operation of the NVR with the icons on the live screen.
Item
Description
It is displayed when there is a problem with the fan.
Displayed if the HDD is full and the NVR has an insufficient space to
record.
Displayed if no HDD is installed or the existing HDD should be replaced.
Displayed if the HDD needs a technical examination.
It is displayed when the max permitted amount of data for each channel is exceeded.
System Operation
It is displayed when the network is overloaded.
`` It occurs when the max receiving performance is exceeded, causing an overload to the
CPU. It will disappear if you modify the camera setting or delete a camera to reduce
the level of performance overload.
It is displayed when there is firmware to update the server. It is displayed when there
is firmware to update the server.
It is displayed if the battery level for an NVR device is empty.
If you press the screen stop button, it is displayed.
It is displayed when all the channels are switched at the set time interval.
120_ live viewer
To capture a screen
1. Click <
> button.
When a pop-up window appears, select the saving path for
captured image.
● live viewer
2. Select the path and name the file. And then click the [OK]
button.
3. Save current camera's video image as .bmp, .jpg or .png file.
the viewer is running without the administrator's permission in
JJ `` IfWindows
Vista/7, you may not save the captured image as .bmp, .
jpg or .png file.
To print a screen
1. Click <
> button.
2. Print current camera's video image with the printer connected
to the PC operating the Web Viewer.
English _121
live viewer
Setting the layout
If you don't add or save it in the layout after registering a camera,
the live screen will not be displayed.
Click on the <
> button to launch the layout setting screen.
If you want to add a layout
Click on <
>.
Set the layout name to add and click on the <OK> button to
add it.
If you want to change the layout name
Select the layout name to change and click on <
>.
After changing the name, click on the outside of the layout
window to change the name.
If you want to save the layout
Click on <
>.
The changed layout will be saved.
MM `` The layout for each user is saved separately.
122_ live viewer
CAM 01 - TEXT 01
CAM 02 - TEXT 01
CAM 03 - TEXT 01
CAM 04 - TEXT 01
CAM 05 - TEXT 01
CAM 06 - TEXT 01
CAM 07 - TEXT 01
CAM 08 - TEXT 01
CAM 09 - TEXT 01
CAM 10 - TEXT 01
CAM 11 - TEXT 01
CAM 12 - TEXT 01
CAM 13 - TEXT 01
CAM 14 - TEXT 01
CAM 15 - TEXT 01
CAM 16 - TEXT 01
If you want to delete the layout
After selecting the layout to delete, click on <
The selected layout will be deleted.
>.
● live viewer
you press the Save or Delete button, changes will not be
MM `` Unless
saved.
Changing Split Mode
When clicking the Split Mode selection button, the screen is
changed into the selected split mode.
To go to your desired channel screen
Press the <
channel group.
> button to move to the previous/next
To switch to full screen mode
Click <
>.
Current split screen appears in full screen.
Press the [ESC] key to exit the full screen mode.
`` MAC Safari does not support full screen.
CAM 01 - TEXT 01
CAM 02 - TEXT 01
CAM 03 - TEXT 01
CAM 04 - TEXT 01
CAM 05 - TEXT 01
CAM 06 - TEXT 01
CAM 07 - TEXT 01
CAM 08 - TEXT 01
CAM 09 - TEXT 01
CAM 10 - TEXT 01
CAM 11 - TEXT 01
CAM 12 - TEXT 01
CAM 13 - TEXT 01
CAM 14 - TEXT 01
CAM 15 - TEXT 01
CAM 16 - TEXT 01
English _123
live viewer
Setting screen switching
If you don't register the layout, the screen switching function will
not operate.
You can view the layouts one by one.
Click on the <
window.
1. Push <
order.
> button to launch the switching setting
> sequentially and specify a layout to display in
2. Enter the desired screen switching time.
3. Click on the <OK> button to save the designated sequence.
To perform switching
Click on the <Sequence> button to activate the switching mode
and run a sequence.
124_ live viewer
CAM 01 - TEXT 01
CAM 02 - TEXT 01
CAM 03 - TEXT 01
CAM 04 - TEXT 01
CAM 05 - TEXT 01
CAM 06 - TEXT 01
CAM 07 - TEXT 01
CAM 08 - TEXT 01
CAM 09 - TEXT 01
CAM 10 - TEXT 01
CAM 11 - TEXT 01
CAM 12 - TEXT 01
CAM 13 - TEXT 01
CAM 14 - TEXT 01
CAM 15 - TEXT 01
CAM 16 - TEXT 01
CH1
CH5
CH2
CH6
CH3
CH7
CH4
CH8
CH1
CH5
CH2
CH9
CH6
CH3
CH10
CH7
CH4
CH11
CH8
CH12
CH1
CH5
CH2
CH9
CH6
CH3
CH13
CH14
CH10
CH11
CH7
CH8
CH4
CH5
CH9
CH6
CH13
CH10
CH7
CH9
CH13
CH10
CH14
CH11
CH15
CH12
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH1
CH1
CH4
CH4
CH4
CH5
CH5
CH3
CH3
CH6
CH13
CH6
CH14
CH11
CH8
CH15
CH12
CH16
CH15
CH12
CH1
CH1
CH16
CH2
CH7
CH4
CH3
CH5
CH8
CH4
CH2
CH7
CH5
CH3
CH8
CH6
CH4
CH7
CH5
CH8
CH6
CH9
CH7
CH8
CH2
CH3
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH2
H4 CH2
CH5CH3
CH6
CH1
CH3CH3
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH5CH3
CH6
CH1
CH2CH3
CH2
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH5CH3
CH6
CH1
CH3
H2
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH5CH3
CH6
CH1
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH4
CH5CH3 CH8 CH6
CH1
CH2 CH5 CH3CH3 CH6
CH3 CH2
CH4
H7 CH5
CH9 CH1
CH4
CH1
CH2CH3
CH3 CH8 CH6
CH2 CH5
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH9 CH1
CH4
CH6 CH2
CH5CH3 CH8
CH6
CH1
CH2 CH5 CH3
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH9 CH1
CH4
CH6
H5CH3 CH8
CH6
CH1
CH5 CH2 CH5
CH6 CH3 CH7
CH8
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH9 CH1
CH6
CH1CH4
CH4
CH6
CH1
CH3
CH3 CH6
CH6
CH3 CH8
CH2 CH5
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH9 CH1
CH4
CH1
CH2CH3
CH3
H3 CH8 CH6
CH2 CH5
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH9 CH1
CH4
CH6 CH2
CH6
CH1
CH2 CH5 CH3
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH8 CH6
CH9 CH1
CH4
CH6
CH1
CH5 CH2 CH5
CH6 CH3 CH7
CH8
CH3 CH2
CH4
H8 CH6
CH9 CH1
CH6
CH1CH4
CH4
CH8
CH1
CH3CH3 CH6
CH6
CH3
CH4
CH9
CH4
CH5
CH1
CH2
CH6
CH1
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH9
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH1
CH2
H6
CH1
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH9
CH4
CH5 CH3
CH6
CH1
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH10
CH3
CH4
CH9
CH5
CH6
CH2
CH1CH4
CH4
CH8
CH1
CH1
CH3
CH4
CH9
CH4
CH5 CH3
CH6
CH3
CH4
CH9
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH3
CH4
H9
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH10
CH11
CH3
CH4
CH4 CH5
CH5
CH6
CH1
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH5
CH6
Auto Sequence
CH9
CH8
CH4
CH10
CH5
CH11
CH1
CH7
CH2
CH1
CH4
CH2
CH5
CH1
CH4
CH9
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH2
CH4
CH5 CH3
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH3
CH4
CH2
CH3
CH5
CH6
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH7
CH8
CH1
CH5
CH2
CH4
CH9
CH6
CH4 CH13
CH10
CH4 CH13
CH3
CH5
CH14
CH11
CH6
CH15
CH12
CH6
CH15
CH16
CH5
CH14
CH16
CH3
CH6
CH1
CH4
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH4
CH5
CH5
CH7
CH7
CH8
CH8
CH3
CH1
CH3
CH6
CH6
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH9
CH3
CH9
CH1
CH4
CH4
CH4
CH4
C
CH5
CH7
CH19
CH12
CH19
CH13
CH13
CH13
CH13
CH1
CH4
CH4
CH1
CH7
CH12
CH19
CH12
CH19
CH12
CH3
CH5
CH5
CH11
CH1
CH7
CH11
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH4
CH4
CH4
CH10
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH6
CH3
CH8
CH9
CH2
CH1
CH3
CH2
CH6
CH3
CH6
CH6
CH9
CH2
CH1
CH3
CH5
CH1
CH16
H1
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH1 CH5
CH1 CH5
CH2
CH3
CH2
CH4
CH3
CH6
CH6
CH7
CH4
CH7
CH8
CH8
CH2
CH2
CH6
CH8
CH10
CH3
CH6
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH8
CH10
CH11
CH1
CH11
CH12
CH5
CH7
CH5
CH1
CH7
CH19
CH12
CH19
CH13
CH13
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH1
CH1
H2
CH1
CH1
CH4
CH10
H1
1
CH2
CH3
CH2
CH3
CH2
CH3
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH1
CH2
H4 CH2
CH5 CH3
CH6
CH1
CH2
4 CH2
CH5 CH3
CH6
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH5 CH3
CH6
CH1
CH2
H2
CH5 CH3
CH6
CH1
CH2
CH5 CH3
CH6
CH10
CH1
CH2
CH3 CH2
CH4
H7 CH5 CH3 CH8 CH6
CH9
CH1
CH3 CH2
CH4
7 CH5 CH3 CH8 CH6
CH9
CH1
CH5 CH3 CH8 CH6
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH9
CH1
H5 CH3 CH8 CH6
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH9
CH1
CH3 CH8 CH6
CH3
CH4
CH9
CH13
CH1
CH2
CH3 CH8 CH6
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH9
CH1
3 CH8 CH6
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH9
CH1
CH3 CH2
CH4
CH8 CH6
CH9
CH1
CH3 CH2
CH4
H8 CH6
CH9
CH1
CH6
CH3
CH4
CH9
CH16
CH6
CH3
CH4
CH9
6
CH3
CH4
CH9
CH3
CH4
CH9
CH3
CH4
CH9
CH3
CH4
CH9
CH3
CH4
CH9
CH3
CH4
9
CH10
CH13
Single mode
MM
CH13
3
5
CH1
CH1
CH14
CH13
CH11
CH16
CH11
CH16
CH14
CH14
1
CH11
CH14
CH12
CH14
CH12
CH12
CH7
CH12
CH7
CH5
16
CH2
CH7
CH5
CH8
CH8
CH5
CH3
CH8
CH6
CH5
CH3
CH8
CH6
CH3
CH1
CH3
CH6
CH6
CH2
CH3
CH9
CH1
CH3
CH9
CH1
CH3
CH15
CH4
CH4
13-16
9-12
5-8
CH1
CH4
CH1
CH4
1-4
4-split mode
CH15
CH1
CH4
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH9
CH9
CH2
CH1
CH1
CH10
CH10
CH15
CH15
CH13
CH13
CH14
CH14
CH4
CH12
CH12
CH5
CH5
CH7
CH7
CH11
CH11
CH2
CH2
CH8
CH8
CH3
CH1
CH3
CH6
CH6
CH9
CH1
CH3
10-16
1-9
CH3
CH9
9-split mode
CH2
CH2
CH4
CH4
CH15
CH15
`` In a split mode, If you have set <Sequence switching time> in "Device > Monitor", Auto Sequence will be conducted at
CH16
the set interval. (Page 85)
CH5
CH6
CH9
CH16
CH16
CH13
CH10
CH14
`` When switching to another channel, the video may be slightly delayed depending on network status.
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH5
CH8
CH6
CH9
CH9
CH10
CH11 CH10
CH13
CH12
CH14
CH15 CH14
CH5
CH13
CH16
CH6
CH9
CH10
`` If you perform automatic switching of a single screen, the layout setting menu will be deactivated during operation.
CH7
CH7
CH16
CH16
CH13
CH5
CH14
CH15
CH10
CH11
CH7
CH4
CH4
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH4
● live viewer
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH4
CH5 CH7
H6 CH3
CH3
CH4
CH5 CH7
CH3
CH4
CH5 CH7
3
CH4
CH5 CH7
H8 CH4
CH19
CH5 CH1
CH7 CH19
CH4
CH5 CH1
CH7 CH19
CH4
CH5 CH1
CH2
CH7 CH19
CH1
CH4
CH5
CH2
H10
CH11 CH7 CH12
CH13
CH1
CH1
40
CH5 CH1
CH2
CH11
CH12CH19 CH13
CH1
CH1
CH7
CH19 CH13
CH5 CH1
CH2
CH11
CH1
CH1
CH7 CH12
CH19 CH13
CH5 CH1
CH2
CH11
CH1
CH1
CH7 CH12
CH19 CH13
CH5 CH1
CH2
CH11
CH12
CH1
CH1
CH7 CH19
CH1
CH5 CH1
CH2
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH1
CH1
CH7
CH2
5 CH1 CH12CH19 CH13
CH2
11
CH1
CH1
CH1 CH7
CH2
CH12CH19 CH13
CH1
CH1
1 CH7 CH19 CH13
CH2
CH1
CH1
CH7 CH12
CH1
CH19 CH13
CH2
CH1
CH1
7 CH12
CH2
CH12CH19 CH13
CH1
CH1
CH2
12CH19 CH13
CH1
CH1
CH19 CH13
CH2
CH1
CH1
CH1
19CH4CH13
CH2
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH13
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH13
CH1
CH1
13
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH4
CH8
CH6
CH1
CH8
CH2
CH11 CH10
CH9
CH3
CH4
CH11
CH12
CH15 CH14
CH5
CH13
CH12
CH15
CH1
CH8
CH5CH2
CH6CH3
CH7CH4
CH11
CH8
CH12
CH12
CH5CH2 CH9
CH6CH3 CH10
CH7CH4 CH11
CH8
CH9
CH10
CH13 CH1
CH14
CH9
CH10
CH13
CH14
CH9
CH10
CH13
CH14
CH9
CH10
CH13
CH14 CH13
CH14
CH3
CH11
CH12 CH16
CH5CH2 CH9
CH6CH3 CH10
CH7CH4
CH8 CH15
CH9
CH10
CH13 CH1
CH14
CH1
CH2
CH9
CH10
CH13
CH14
H9
CH10
CH13
CH14
CH10
CH13
CH14 CH13 CH16
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH3
CH11 CH10
CH12
CH15
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH13 CH2
CH14
CH1
CH11 CH10
CH12
CH15 CH14
CH16
CH13
CH11 CH10
CH12
CH15 CH14
CH16
CH13
CH11
CH12
CH15 CH14
CH16
CH13
CH1 CH10
CH14
CH3
CH11
CH12
CH15 CH9
CH10 CH16
CH11 CH15
CH12 CH16
CH10
CH13
CH14 CH13
CH11 CH10
CH12
CH15 CH14
CH16
CH13
H11 CH10
CH12
CH15
CH16
CH7
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH13
CH14
1 CH10
CH12
CH15 CH14
CH16
CH13
CH13 CH16
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH3
CH12
CH15 CH14
CH10
CH13
CH12
CH15
CH16
CH12
CH15
CH16
CH5CH2
CH6CH3
CH1CH4
CH8
CH7
CH12
CH15
CH16
CH12
CH15
CH16
CH12
CH15
CH16
CH1
CH2
CH12
CH12
CH15
CH16
CH5CH2 CH9CH6CH3 CH10
CH1CH4 CH11
CH8
CH7
CH1
CH2
CH12
CH15
CH16
CH1
CH2
CH12
CH15
CH16
CH1
CH2
CH1 CH16
CH2
CH13
CH14
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH5CH2 CH9CH6CH3
CH1CH4
CH8 CH15
CH7
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH1
CH1 CH16
CH2
CH9CH6 CH13
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH5
CH1 CH14
CH8 CH15
CH3
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH1
CH1 CH16
CH2
CH13
CH9
CH10 CH14
CH11 CH15
CH12
CH3
CH1
CH1
CH2
H3
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH13
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH15
CH16CH7
Checks the text data transmitted from POS systems that are
connected to NVR.
CH1
CH1
If the <
> button is selected, you can turn on/off the
function to query text devices and data located in a separate
area.
CH1
`` A queried device should be set in terms of its usage, channel, etc. by
selecting "Device > Text > Device". (Page 87)
CH6
CH16CH7
How to query text devices and data
CH7
CH16
CH9
CH8
CH11
CH8
CH11
CH1
CH4 CH1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH1
CH1
CH5CH2
CH6CH3
CH7CH4 CH1CH8
CH5
CH9CH6
CH10
CH7
CH11
CH1CH8
CH12
CH9
CH13
CH10
CH14
CH11
CH15
CH12
CH16
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH13
CH7
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5CH2
CH6CH3
CH1CH4
CH8
CH5
CH9CH6
CH10
CH1
CH11
CH8
CH12
CH9
CH13
CH10
CH14
CH11
CH15
CH12
CH16
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH13
CH13
CH12
CH12
CH2
CH14
CH14
CH15
CH15
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH1
CH1
English _125
CH16
CH16
CH2
CH3
CH7
CH13
CH10
live viewer
Controlling a Connected Network Camera
Controlling PTZ
If PTZ camera is connected, the <
> icon appears on screen. When selecting corresponding camera
channel, the PTZ tab is provided to allow you to control the PTZ.
a
n
b
m
c
l
d
k
e
f
g
h
i
Item
j
Description
a
Camera menu
Displays the camera settings menu.
b
Direction Adjustment
Use this to adjust the direction of the camera or click the crosshair in the center to use it as an
OK button.
c
d
e
Digital zoom
Adjust digital zooming to make an image larger or smaller.
Volume control
Change the PC volume between 0 and 100.
f
Preset
Sets the preset position for camera framing and moves to designated preset position when
selecting a desired preset.
g
Swing
Swing is a monitoring function that moves between two preset points and enables you to trace
the motion.
Sound
126_ live viewer
Set audio mute for the PC and camera's audio talk.
Item
Description
Group
Moves in the path specified by combining the preset.
i
Trace
Moves camera's framing in the predefined path.
j
Tour
Moves in the path specified by combining multiple groups.
k
Focus
Adjusts the focus of the camera.
l
Zoom
Zooms in/out the image by controling camera's zoom.
m
Sensitivity
Adjust the sensitivity of your camera operation.
n
Digital Zoom Off
Returns to the original size from the zoomed state.
● live viewer
h
To set a preset
1. Click <
2. Click on <
> button to display "Preset" window.
> to select the preset order.
3. Enter the name of preset.
4. Use direction keys to adjust the direction which camera
aims at.
5. Click the <
> button.
To activate the preset
1. Click <
> button to display "Preset" window.
2. Select a desired preset to activate from the list.
The camera's framing moves to the preset position.
To activate Swing(Auto-pan), Group(Scan), Trace(Pattern) and Tour
You can activate listed functions in the same manner as using a preset. For more information, refer to
corresponding user manul of applicable camera.
MM `` Only selective functions of the camera can be supported, depending on camera.
English _127
search viewer
Search Viewer
You can search and play the video record saved in NVR by accessing NVR remotely.
Search Viewer Screen
a
b
CAM 01
2015-01-01 12:52:25
CAM 02
2015-01-01 12:52:25
CAM 03
2015-01-01 12:52:25
CAM 04
2015-01-01 12:52:25
j
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
Item
Description
a
Menu Selection
Switches to the corresponding menu screen by clicking each menu.
b
Calendar
Displays the video-recorded date in blue and today in red. Click the date in blue color to display
the recorded video information in timeline.
c
Channel selection
Displays the search channels.
d
Search
Search for the user designated channel for the selected date.
e
Text Search
Searches data that was entered into POS systems connected to NVR.
f
Channel displays
Display the selected channel number.
128_ search viewer
Item
Description
Change the PC volume between 0 and 100.
Capture
Saves current video for selected channel in the designated path.
Print
Prints current video image for selected channel through the assigned printer.
Section backup
Backup the video for the selected section.
Keep ch. scr ratio
Changes screen ratio of the selected channel.
Keep full scr ratio
Changes screen ratio for all channels.
Magnify/Shrink
Magnify or shrink the current video for the selected channel.
OSD
Displays the channel information.
Full screen
Show the four way split screen in the full screen.
h
Sound control
Adjust the audio for the video searched.
i
Recording Color
Displays the corresponding color depending on recorded data type if you place your mouse
cursor on that area.
j
Display Pane
Plays corresponding data on the screen if you select a search result.
g
● Search Viewer
Sound
Time Search
You can search recorded data by setting date and time.
To search by date
You can select the search date by using calendar.
> to select the year/month for your search.
1. Click on < ,
If a date has data associated with it, it is displayed in blue. The current date is displayed as a blue box.
2. Click the date to search in calendar.
The first image of searched video data on the date is displayed on screen and the data is displayed in the
timeline.
3. To search video data on today, click <Today>.
Today's date is selected.
English _129
search viewer
Color indications depending on current recording status
Displays the corresponding color according to the recorded data type.
2 or more kinds of recording type are mixed for the same timeline, only the recording type with higher priority is displayed.
MM `` If(Priority:
Standard > Motion > Schedule > Sensor > Camera Event > Audio Detection > DST)
To adjust timeline
If searched data are overlapping, you can select a desired data, move its playback time point, and zoom in/out
the timeline.
1. Select the number of data to search if data is overlapping.
It appears only when data are overlapped and assigns <0> to the most recent data.
2. Click your desired time point to play on the timeline.
The playback start point is moved.
3. Click <+> / <-> to zoom in/out the zoom factor to display time.
4. When magnified, if you want to view the pre/post timeline, click on the timeline and drag it in the direction
you want to move it.
If you want to check the recording list
The results for each recording section will be displayed.
130_ search viewer
Text Search
You can search data that was entered into POS systems connected to NVR.
● Search Viewer
If you want to search by a text
1. Select a date and time to search.
2. Set event keywords and search conditions.
-- Search Condition : Enter a text to search.
-- Event Keyword : Searches based on the condition set in
"Device > Text > Event settings". (Page 88)
-- <Case Sensitive> : If checked, search terms are casesensitive.
-- <Whole Word> : If checked, only results that exactly
match the input search terms are returned.
3. Click the <Search> button.
`` Refer to <Text Search> for the detailed text search method. (Page 111)
If you want to restore text search
When you enter search conditions and replay the search result
with ON/OFF button in the upper right hand, it is possible to
query text data.
English _131
search viewer
Names and Functions of Play Buttons
a
b
c
d
e
Item
Description
a
Back
Returns to the previous event.
b
Previous frame
Move backward one sec.
c
Backward X times
speed playing
Used to rewind at X times the speed.
d
Stop
Stops the video replay.
e
Play/Pause
Video is played and paused.
f
Forward X times
speed playing
Play the video forward at X times the speed.
g
Next frame
Move forward one sec.
h
Move forward
Proceeds to the next event.
132_ search viewer
f
g
h
setup viewer
Setup Viewer
You can configure the NVR settings remotely on the network.
To configure the NVR settings, click <Setup>.
● setup viewer
Settings Screen
a
b
c
d
b
e
Item
Description
a
Menu Selection
Click each menu to switch into corresponding menu screen.
b
Parent Menu
Configure the settings or select a parent item to change the existing settings.
c
Sub-Menu
Among the sub-menus of selected parent menu, select a desired item to set.
d
Detailed Menu
Click desired item's input field to change and enter a desired value.
e
OK
Apply the modified settings.
English _133
setup viewer
System
You can configure the various settings of the NVR system.
Date/Time/Language
For more information, refer to "Date/Time/Language" in the "System" menu. (Page 59)
Date/Time
Set the date and time.
Time Synchronization Setup
Set the time synchronization.
DST (Daylight Saving Time)
During the summer, Daylight Saving Time (DST) advances
clocks one hour forwards from the standard local time zone.
Language
Select a preferred language for the NVR.
Holiday
A user can select specific dates as holidays according to their
own preferences.
134_ setup viewer
Permission Management
For more information, refer to "User" in the "System Setup" menu. (Page 61)
Admin
● setup viewer
You can change the admin ID or the password.
`` ID allows alphanumeric characters only.
`` If the admin ID is not used for access, you cannot change the ID.
`` If the ID being used is changed, you will be automatically logged out.
User
You can add, change or remove a user or users.
Permission Setup
You can set the user permission.
English _135
setup viewer
System Management
For more information, refer to "System Management" in the "System" menu. (Page 65)
System Information
You can see information of the current system.
Check the software version and MAC address.
Settings
Using a storage device, you can apply the current configuration
of NVR to another NVR.
Press the Initialize button to return the network settings to their
factory default state. Items in the <Not Included> category are
excluded from the initialization.
Log information
System log
Data recorded in the system log displays various system-related
logs/date/time such as system starts, system ending and menu
setting changes.
136_ setup viewer
Event log
The event log lists recorded events, such as sensor events,
camera events, or image losses.
● setup viewer
Backup log
You can inquire about a user who performed a backup,
execution time, details (backup time, channel, backup device,
backup file type).
English _137
setup viewer
Device
You can check a list of devices that are connected to the NVR and configure the necessary settings.
Click <Device> in the menu screen.
For more information, refer to "Setting the Device". (Page 70)
Camera
Cam Registration
You can add a network camera(s).
Camera Setup
You can change the settings of a connected network camera.
Live Setup
You can change the life transfer settings of the network camera.
138_ setup viewer
Channel Setup
You can configure the video settings for each channel.
● setup viewer
Storage Device
You can check and change the settings related to the data storage device.
Device/format
You can check a storage device, amount of use, type of use
and status of storage device.
HDD Alarm
You can set the alarm output port and the duration in case an
error occurs.
English _139
setup viewer
Monitor
Monitor
You can configure the monitoring screen settings and set the
output system.
the video is not played properly, refer to the troubleshooting
MM `` Ifsection
later in this manual. (Page 166)
`` The Monitor Setup settings control the monitor connected to the
NVR.
Text
Device
Relevant values of a device connected to NVR can be set.
Event
It is possible to set total amount conditions and keywords to
display events of a text device.
140_ setup viewer
Record
For more information, refer to "Setting the Recording". (Page 89)
● setup viewer
Recording Schedule
If you set a recording schedule for a specific date and time, the
recording will start at that specific time.
Record Setup
NVR
Select a type of the normal/event recording frame rate for each
channel.
English _141
setup viewer
Camera
You can set the recording profile for a network camera.
Record Option
You can set the Disk End Mode.
142_ setup viewer
Event
For more information, refer to "Setting the Event". (Page 93)
● setup viewer
Sensor Detection
NVR / Camera
You can set the sensor operation mode and the synchronized
camera as well as the alarm output type and the duration.
`` If the connected network camera that has configured the alarm in/out
settings triggers an alarm, NVR will perform the alarm out.
Camera Event
You can set the camera event mode, the alarm output type and
the alarm time.
Video Loss Detection
You can set to trigger the alarm if a video loss occurs.
English _143
setup viewer
Alarm Out Schedule
You can schedule the alarm output according to the day of the
week and the time.
The default setting is Event Sync, which activates the alarm only
if an event occurs.
Network
For more information, refer to "Network Configuration". (Page 97)
Interface
A remote user can access the NVR via the network to check the current mode and the IP address.
Network
Specify the network connection path.
Port
You can configure the protocol related settings.
144_ setup viewer
DDNS
Network
You can check the DDNS settings.
● setup viewer
IP Filtering
You can prepare the list of IP address to allow or block
accesses to a specific IP address.
SSL
You can select a security connection system or install public
certificates.
using HTTPS, if you want to switch to HTTP, then abnormal
MM `` While
operation can take place as the browser contains the setting
values. You need to change the URL to HTTP and reconnect or
initialize the cookie setting of the browser.
English _145
setup viewer
802.1x
When connecting to a network, you can select whether to use
the 802.1x protocol and install corresponding certificate.
Live Streaming
You can configure the network transfer settings of the network
camera.
E-mail
You can specify the SMTP server that sends a mail if an event occurs and set the recipient group and users.
SMTP
You can set the server that sends mails and specify if you use
the authentication process.
146_ setup viewer
Event
You can set the event interval and specify which events the
server sends mails for.
● setup viewer
Recipient
You can set groups and recipients to receive emails.
SNMP
Using the SNMP protocol, the system or network administrator
can remotely monitoring the network devices and sets the
environment.
English _147
setup viewer
DHCP Server
Network
You can set the internal DHCP server and assign an IP address
to the network camera.
Check IP
You can check the IP and MAC currently used through the
DHCP server, and the connected network port.
148_ setup viewer
Using the setting icons
•
•
: If the button is selected, you can turn on/off the function
to query text devices and data that are located in a separate
area.
● setup viewer
•
: Display the ID of user connected.
: You can register a network camera for each channel
and easily set the resolution and the number of shots in case
of event occurrence or manaual recording.
`` For more on how to register a camera, refer to "To register a camera".
(Page 70)
•
: You can manually enter the desired backup channel
and time/date to backup the recorded video.
`` You can select whether or not to "Text data included" for SEC format.
English _149
setup viewer
•
: You can check the recording status and the status of
camera connected.
-- Live : Select <Live> to check the status of camera
connected to each channel and the transmission
information.
-- Recording : Select <Record> to check the following for
each channel : profile, recording type, inputs / recording
transmission rate, settings / inputs / amount of recorded
data.
-- PoE : Select <PoE> to check the consumption by PoE
connected to each channel.
`` Click on <
> to move to Device > Camera >
Camera Registration.
For more on camera registration, refer to "To register a camera".
(Page 70)
> : You will be immediately directed to the homepage
• <
of Samsung Techwin. (http ://www.samsungcctv.com/).
150_ setup viewer
backup viewer
SEC Backup Viewer
You can play a file that is backed up in the format of SEC.
Backup in SEC format produces backup data file, library file and self-executable viewer file.
a
b
c
d
l
e
k
● backup viewer
If you run the backup file viewer, the backup data file will be played.
f g h
ji
Recommended System Requirements
PCs with a lower specification than the recommended below may not fully support forward/backward and highspeed playback.
•OS : Windows XP professional, Windows Vista, Windows 7
•CPU : Intel Core 2 Quad 2.5GHz or higher
•RAM : 3GB or more
•VGA : Geforce 6200 or higher
English _151
backup viewer
Item
a
b
Description
Selects screen ratio to display.
Split screen
The screen is changed to a split screen.
If <
> is pushed, it is possible to change to a fish eye installation type. It is
possible to select WALL/GROUND/CEILING mode according to the installation
place.
Fish eye view
mode
It is possible to change the fish eye view mode of the current screen according to
each split screen.
Enlarge the image by up to 100 times as big as the current one.
Press the Zoom In ( ) button the enlarge the image; press the Zoom Out
( ) button to shrink the image.
You can also use the slide bar (
) in the pop-up window to zoom in/out.
Press ( ) on a size-changed video to restore the default zoom factor
(100%).
If you enlarge the image by more than 200%, the enlarged area will be
marked on the digital zooming screen. Click on the marked area and move it
to a desired position.
The digital zooming is applied to all backup viewer. When the digital zooming
is canceled, the video size will restore the default rate of 100%.
c
Digital Zoom
d
Screen Printout
e
Audio
f
Watermark
g
Deinterlace
You can enable the De-interlace function.
h
Show OSD
Check the OSD checkbox to display the OSD information on the backup playback
screen.
Information such as backup date, day of the week, time, model name, and
channel number will be displayed on the screen.
i
Enlarge /
Reduce Timeline
j
Restore Timeline
k
l
Saves the current video's image as in an image file. Supports JPEG file format.
Prints out the current screen. You should have installed the appropriate printer
driver before you can print out the screen.
/
You can adjust the volume level from 0 to 100.
/
Display of storage time range
Playback Control
152_ backup viewer
A toggle button. Each time you press this button, the audio output will toggle
between activated and deactivated.
Press the button to enable file tampering detection, to detect data file forging.
Collapses the time range that is displayed on the range bar of the storage time.
You can collapse the range bar until the overall range is shortened to 24 hours.
Enlarges the time range that is displayed on the range bar of the storage time.
You can enlarge the range bar until the overall range is extended to 1 minute.
Restores the timeline to the default.
Displays the time range of a stored video file.
You can move the gridline of the range bar to select a time point to play.
You can adjust the video playback of the timeline.
appendix
Product Specification
Item
SRN-873S
SRN-1673S
Display
Network Camera
Inputs
Max. 4CH
Resolution
CIF ~ 8MP
Protocols
Samsung, ONVIF
Local Display
HDMI/VGA
Max. 8CH
Max. 16CH
yy SRN-473S
[Local Monitor] : 1 / 4 / Auto Sequence
[Web] : 1 / 4 / Auto Sequence
Multi-Channel
Display
yy SRN-873S
[Local Monitor] : 1 / 4 / 6 / 8 / Auto Sequence
[Web] : 1 / 4 / 8 / Auto Sequence
yy SRN-1673S
[Local Monitor] : 1 / 4 / 6 / 8 / 9 / 13 / 16 / Auto Sequence
[Web] : 1 / 4 / 9 / 16 / Auto Sequence
Live
yy SRN-473S
[Local Monitor] : 8 MP(20fps), 5MP(30fps), 3MP(50fps), 2MP(120fps), 720p(120fps),
D1(120fps)
[Web] : 5MP(30fps), 3MP(60fps), 2MP(120fps), 720p(120fps), D1(120fps)
Performance
yy SRN-873S
[Local Monitor] : 8 MP(20fps), 5MP(30fps), 3MP(50fps), 2MP(150fps), 720p(240fps),
D1(240fps)
[Web] : 5MP(30fps), 3MP(60fps), 2MP(120fps), 720p(240fps), D1(480fps)
yy SRN-1673S
[Local Monitor] : 8 MP(20fps), 5MP(30fps), 3MP(50fps), 2MP(150fps), 720p(240fps),
D1(480fps)
[Web] : 5MP(30fps), 3MP(60fps), 2MP(120fps), 720p(240fps), D1(480fps)
English _153
● appendix
SRN-473S
Details
appendix
Item
Details
SRN-473S
SRN-873S
SRN-1673S
Performance
Operating System
Record
Embedded
Linux
Compression
H.264, MJPEG
Recording Bandwidth
32Mbps, 2MP 4camera
real-time recording
Resolution
CIF ~ 8MP
Type
Normal, Scheduled, Event (Pre/Post)
Event Trigger
Search & Play
154_ appendix
64Mbps, 2MP 8camera
real-time recording
80Mbps, 2MP 16camera
real-time recording
-- Alarm Input(2)
-- Alarm Input(4)
-- Alarm Input(8)
-- Camera Event
(Alarm-In, MD, Video
Analytics)
-- Camera Event
(Alarm-In, MD, Video
Analytics)
-- Camera Event
(Alarm-In, MD, Video
Analytics)
-- Video Loss
-- Video Loss
Event Action
e-Mail, PTZ Preset, Alarm Out, Buzzer, Monitor Out
Playback Bandwidth
32Mbps
Performance
Max. 3 Users
Mode
Date & Time(Calendar), Event Log list, Text Search(POS)
-- Video Loss
Item
Storage
Backup
Sensor
Audio
SRN-473S
SRN-873S
Simultaneous
playback
[Local Monitor] : Up to
4CH
Resolution
CIF ~ 8MP
Fish-Eye Dewarping
Via Smartviewer
Playback Control
Fast/Slow Forward/Backward, Move one step up/down
Internal
1 SATA
2 SATA
External(DAS)
N/A
1 e-SATA
Max.Capacity
Internal 4TB
Internal 8TB
File backup
BU/EXE(USB), JPG/AVI(Web, CMS)
Function
Max. 4CH Playback,
Date-Time/Title display
Max. 8CH Playback,
Date-Time/Title display
Max. 16CH Playback,
Date-Time/Title display
I/O
2/1 (NO/NC 1EA)
4/3 (NO 2EA, NO/NC 1EA)
8/4 (NO 3EA, NO/NC 1EA)
Input
4CH (network)
8CH (network)
16CH (network)
Compression
G.711, G.726, AAC(16/48KHz)
Audio Communication
2-Way
[Web, CMS] : Up to 4CH
[Local Monitor] : Up to
8CH
SRN-1673S
[Web, CMS] : Up to 8CH
[Local Monitor] : Up to
16CH
[Web, CMS] : Up to 16CH
4 SATA (HDD removable
at front)
Internal 16TB
English _155
● appendix
Search & Play
Details
appendix
Item
SRN-473S
Details
SRN-873S
SRN-1673S
Network
Protocol
TCP/IP, UDP/IP, RTP(UDP), RTP(TCP), RTSP, NTP, HTTP, DHCP(Server, Client), PPPoE,
SMTP, ICMP, IGMP, ARP, DNS, DDNS, uPnP, HTTPS, SNMP, ONVIF Profile S
DDNS
Samsung iPolis DDNS
Transmission Bandwidth
Max. 64Mbps
Max Remote Users
Search(3) / Live unicast(10) / Live multicast(20)
IP Version
IPv4/v6
Security
User access Log
IP Filtering
802.1x
Encryption
Max. 128Mbps
Max. 160Mbps
GUI
English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Russian, Turkish, Polish, Dutch, Swedish,
Czech, Portuguese, Danish, Rumanian, Serbian, Croatian, Hungarian, Greek,
Norwegian, Finnish, Korean, Chinese, Japanese, Thai
Web
English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Russian, Turkish, Polish, Dutch, Swedish,
Czech, Portuguese, Danish, Rumanian, Serbian, Croatian, Hungarian, Greek,
Norwegian, Finnish, Korean, Chinese, Japanese, Thai
Language
OS
Supported OS : Window XP(service pack 2 or above), Vista, 7, 8, Mac OS X(10.6 or above)
Web Browser
Microsoft Internet Explorer (Updated Ver. 8~10, IE 9 or above recommended),
Mozilla Firefox (Ver. 19.x or above),
Google Chrome (Ver. 26.x or above),
Apple Safari (Ver. 6.0.3 or above)
Viewer Software
156_ appendix
Type
SSM, Webviewer, Smart Viewer, iPolis Mobile Viewer
CMS Support
Support SDK/CGI(SUNAPI)
Item
Details
SRN-473S
SRN-873S
SRN-1673S
Register
Camera Setup
Camera Power
Control
IP Address, Add Profile Edit, Bitrate, Compression, GOP, Quality
Setup Items
PoE
Smart phone
System Control
Camera MD Setup
Video Setup(Simple Focus, Brightness/Contrast, Flip/Mirror, IRIS, WDR, D&N, SSNR,
Shutter, SSDR, DIS)
Monitor PoE Power consumption
On/Off Control for each PoE camera
Remote Reset for each PoE camera
Setup Wizard (Date/Time, Network, Auto Camera Configuration)
Easy Configuration
PTZ
PnP mode, Manual mode
Control
Via GUI, Webviewer, SPC-2000
Preset
255
OS
Android / iOS
Control
Live(4CH) / Playback(1CH)
Control Applications
Mouse, IR Remocon, Web, SPC-2000(Controller)
Indicator/Interface
Front
Indicator
Power Status LED 1EA
Alarm Status LED 1EA
Record Status LED 1EA
USB
2EA (Front 2EA)
Power Status LED 1EA
HDD Action LED 1EA
Alarm Status LED 1EA
Record Status LED 1EA
Network Action LED 1EA
Backup LED 1EA
2EA (Front 1EA, Rear 1EA)
English _157
● appendix
Functions
appendix
Item
Connectors
Details
SRN-473S
SRN-873S
SRN-1673S
VGA
1EA
HDMI
1EA
Audio
Out(1 EA, RCA, Line)
Ethernet
RJ-45 4EA (PoE/PoE+,
100Mbps),
RJ-45 8EA (PoE/PoE+,
100Mbps),
RJ-45 16EA (PoE/PoE+,
100Mbps),
Alarm
In(2EA, Terminal Block)
In(4EA, Terminal Block)
In(8EA, Terminal Block)
Reset
Yes (Factory Reset)
Log List
Max. 20,000 (System Log, Event Log each)
RJ-45 1EA (WAN,
100Mbps)
Out(1EA, Terminal Block)
RJ-45 1EA (WAN,
1Gbps)
Out(3EA, Terminal Block)
RJ-45 2EA (LAN/WAN,
1Gbps)
Out(4EA, Terminal Block)
Yes (Factory Reset, Alarm
Reset)
System
Log
Environmental
Operating Temperature / Humidity
+0°C to +40°C (32°F ~ 104°F)
Humidity
20% ~ 85%
Electrical
Power Input
54V DC / 1.67A
AC 100-240V ~ 50/60Hz
3-1.5A
AC 100-240V ~ 50/60Hz
6-3A
Power Consumption
Max. 77W (1 HDD, PoE
on), 16W(1 HDD, PoE off)
Max. 166W (2 HDD, PoE
on), 44W(2 HDD, PoE off)
Max. 309W (4 HDD, PoE
on), 57W(4 HDD, PoE off)
PoE Budget
Max. 50W
Max. 100W
Max. 200W
Mechanical
Color / Material
Black / Metal
Dimension (WxHxD)
360 x 44 x 159.9mm
(14.17" x 1.73" x 6.3")
(1U)
370 x 44 x 320mm
(14.57" x 1.73" x 12.6")
(1U)
440 x 88 x 384.8mm
(17.32" x 3.46" x 15.15")
(2U)
Weight
Approx. 1.54kg (3.4lb),
(1TB HDD 1EA included)
Approx. 3.1kg (6.83lb),
(1TB HDD 1EA included)
Approx. 5.43kg (11.98lb),
(1TB HDD 1EA included)
158_ appendix
Product Overview
• SRN-473S
unit : mm (inches)
● appendix
English _159
appendix
• SRN-873S
160_ appendix
unit : mm (inches)
• SRN-1673S
unit : mm (inches)
● appendix
English _161
appendix
Default Setting
To reset the system, move to "System Management > Settings > Load Factory Default" and press the
<Initialization> button.
This returns the factory default settings.
you initialize the system without changing the <Authority Setting>, you must enter the ID and password to log into the
MM `` When
system after it reboots. The ID and password are "admin" and "4321", respectively.
Please change the password after you log in.
`` The default settings are based on SRN-1673S.
`` The initial administrator ID is "admin" and the password should be set when logging in for the first time.
`` Please change your password every three months to safely protect personal information and to prevent the damage of the information theft.
Please, take note that it's a user's responsibility for the security and any other problems caused by mismanaging a password.
Category
Details
Date/Time/Language
Date/Time/Language
Admin
System
User
System Management
Log Information
Camera
Storage Device
162_ appendix
Restricted Access
Permission Setup
System Information
System Log
Event Log
Backup Log
Cam Registration
Camera Setup
Live Setup
Channel Setup
Device
Date
Time
Time Zone
Time Sync.
DST
Language
Holiday
ID
Device/Format
Restriction on Network Access
Auto Log out
Manual Input of ID
Device Name
Log List
Log List
User
Video
Audio
Camera Name
Device
Usage
Status
Temperature
Factory Default
YYYY-MM-DD
24 hours
GMT
OFF
OFF
English
OFF
admin
Backup/Record/Record
Stop/Search/PTZ/Remote
Alarm Out/Shutdown
None
3 Min
OFF
NVR
Setup Start (Local)
Video Loss Detection
admin
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
CAM 01 ~ CAM 16
HDD
Internal
Normal
31°C/86°F
Category
Storage Device
HDD Alarm
Remote Device
Remote Control
ID
Monitor
Text
Recording Schedule
Record
Record Setup
Record Option
Monitor
Device
Event
CH1~CH16
Standard
Event
Pre Event
POST Event
Audio
Disk End Mode
Auto Delete
Check Alarm Output Port
Duration
Replace Alarm Output Port
Duration
Event Display
Display
Sequence switching time
Video Output
Display Position Setup
Device
Use
Port
Encoding type
Total amount
Disk End Beep
Factory Default
BEEP
Continuous
BEEP
Continuous
ON
00
OFF
All
5 sec
VGA(1280x1024)
30
TEXT 01~16
Not Use
7001~7016
US-ASCll
0
Both(Cont&Evnt)
Full
Full
OFF
1 min
OFF
Overwrite
OFF
180
English _163
● appendix
Device
Details
appendix
Category
Details
NVR
Sensor Detection
Network Camera
Event
Camera Event
Camera
Video loss detection
Alarm Out Schedule
Sensor Operation
Cam
Alarm Out
Duration
Sensor Operation
Cam
Alarm Out
Duration
Camera Event
MD
Cam
Alarm
Alarm Duration
Video loss status
Alarm Out
Alarm Duration
IP Type
Network 1 (Camera)
Network
Network 2 (Viewer)
Subnet Mask
Gateway
Network
Interface
Port
164_ appendix
DNS
Protocol Type
Device Type
UDP Port
Multicast IP Address
Multicast TTL
HTTP Port
Send SSL
Backup Bandwidth
Factory Default
OFF
Camera No.
None
10 sec
OFF
Camera No.
None
10 sec
OFF
OFF
Camera No.
None
10 sec
OFF
None
10 sec
Alarm Out1
Static
PnP mode :
192.168.231.200
Manual mode :
192.168.1.200
192.168.2.200
255.255.255.0
PnP mode : 192.168.231.1
Manual mode :
192.168.1.1
168.126.63.1
TCP
554
8000~8159
224.126.63.1
5
80
OFF
Low
Category
DDNS
IP Filtering
Details
Network1/2
SSL
Secured Connection System
Network
SMTP
E-Mail
Event
Recipient
Network
SNMP
Network 1 (Camera)
DHCP Server
Network 2 (Viewer)
Enable IEEE 802.1x
Port
Use Authentication
Secure Transfer
Event Interval
Use Event Transfer
Group Name
Permission
Enable SNMP v1
Enable SNMP v2
Enable SNMP v3
Enable SNMP Traps
IP Address
Subnet Mask
IP Range
IP Lease time
IP Address
Subnet Mask
IP Range
IP Lease time
OFF
Deny
HTTP (Non-secured
connection)
OFF
OFF
25
OFF
Never
10 min
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
192.168.1.200
255.255.255.0
PnP mode :
192.168.231.1
~ 192.168.231.254
Manual mode :
192.168.1.1
~ 192.168.1.254
86400
192.168.2.200
255.255.255.0
192.168.2.1 ~
192.168.2.254
86400
English _165
● appendix
802.1x
Live Streaming
DDNS Site
Filtering Type
Factory Default
appendix
Troubleshooting
Problem
Action
The system does not turn on and the indicator on the
front panel does not work at all.
yy Check if the power supply system is properly connected.
yy Check the system for the input voltage from the power source.
yy If the problem persists even after you have taken the above actions, check
the power supplier and replace it with a new one if neccessary.
yy Check inside if the cables are properly connected. (SMPS, FRONT)
Some channels display just a black screen even if
they receive video sources.
yy Check if the camera is properly supplied with power.
yy Check the video output connecting the camera's webviewer.
yy Check if the network port is properly connected and the network setting is
set correctly.
yy Change the hub supporting Gigabit, it may solves.
Even if you press the [REC] button on your remote
control, the REC LED does not turn on and no
recording is done.
yy Check if there is recording space in the HDD.
yy In the menu, check if the recording mode is set to ON.
yy In the menu, check if the number of general recordings is turned <OFF>.
The screen displays the logo image repeatedly.
yy This may occur from a problem with the main board, or the related software is
corrupt.
Contact the nearest service center for more information.
The Channel button does not work on the Live
screen.
yy The Channel button does not work if the current screen is in the event
monitoring mode.
If it is the event monitoring screen, press the [ALARM] button to terminate the
event screen and select a channel.
The cursor will not move to the Start button when I
start the calendar search.
yy Check if the channel and the date that you want to play are marked with the V
symbol.
Both channel and date should be checked before you can start playing with
the Start button.
No video is played on the connected monitor.
yy Check if the necessary cables are connected to the monitor properly.
yy If the screen is not displayed even when a connection is made, then check the
remote control, and press the [STOP (@)]  [ZOOM]  [STOP (@)] 
[ZOOM]  [MENU] button to launch the basic resolution information window.
You can set the desired resolution here. If the screen is not displayed after a
while, then wait until the basic resolution window appear. Again, switch to
another resolution and and finally switch to the final output resolution.
yy Some monitors do not support the NVR output (HDMI or VGA).
(NVR output resolution : VGA : 1024*768, 1280*1024, HDMI : 720P, 1080P)
Check the monitor resolution
166_ appendix
Problem
When an alarm occurs, I try to press the [ALARM]
button on my remote control to cancel it but an
alarm keeps running and it cannot be cancelled.
Action
yy Press the [MENU] button on your remote control to cancel the alarm.
1) Event monitoring screen cancellation: monitoring mode - Turn off the event
monitoring time.
3) Canceling events: event recording mode - alarm (camera event/video loss)
- Turn off the mode.
No response controlling PTZ in the live viewer.
yy Check the registered Camera if it support PTZ function.
The camera is not connected or the PC fails to
connect to the product.
yy Check if the network cable is connected properly.
yy Ensure that you have set Network – Connection Mode.
yy Check the IP setting of the PC or camera.
yy Try the Ping Test.
yy Check if there is a different device near the product uses the same IP.
I registered a camera, but the web viewer does not
show live video.
yy After registering a camera, a user need to edit/save the desired layout, before
the screen split mode and live screen fit for the setting appears.
In the web viewer, the screen does not switch
automatically.
yy You need to select the desired layout for sequence operation, in the automatic
switching menu.
The Live screen is too bright or too dark.
yy Check the video settings of the registered camera.
A message of "Need to reset date/time." Is displayed
on the screen.
yy This message is displayed if there occurs a problem with the time setting of
the internal clock or an error in the clock itself.
Contact the retailer or the service center for more information.
The time bar is not displayed in Search mode.
yy The timeline can switch between normal and extension mode.
In extension mode, the time bar may not be displayed in the current timeline.
Switch to normal mode or use the left or right button to navigate through the
time bar.
The "NO HDD" icon and an error message are
displayed.
yy Check the HDD for connection. If the problem persists in a normal condition,
contact the nearest service center to have the HDD checked by the service
personnel.
I have installed an additional HDD on the NVR but it
does not recognize the HDD.
yy See the compatibilty list to check if the additional HDD is supported by the
NVR. For the compatibility list, contact the retailer where you purchased the
NVR.
I have connected an external storage device (USB
Memory, USB HDD) to the NVR but the NVR seems
not to recognize it.
yy See the compatibility list of external storage devices to check if the connected
device is supported by the NVR. For the compatibility list, contact the retailer
where you purchased the NVR.
English _167
● appendix
2) Canceling alarm sounds: event recording mode - alarm (camera event/
video loss) - Mute the alarm output.
appendix
Problem
If I press the ESC key in full screen mode of the
WebViewer, the system does not switch to a normal
split mode.
I found it difficult to configure the network settings if
using the default search, backup and router settings.
Action
yy Press the ALT+TAB keys to select 'ACTIVE MOVIE' and press the ESC key
again. The system will switch to a normal split mode.
yy For more information, refer to the user manual.
yy If you want to check the basics of the product for a quick start, refer to the
quick start guide (backup, search).
yy If you use the router for network connection, refer to the "Connecting
and Setting the Network" section in this manual.
I forgot the password.
yy Contact the NVR administrator for help.
Backup data is just not played by the PC or NVR.
yy When you are backing up data, you have choices about the player either: PC
or NVR. Make your selection before proceeding.
yy If you are using the PC to play the data, the format of the backup file should
be either SEC.
yy If you are using the NVR for this purpose, formatting backup files should be
done by the NVR.
You cannot move to live while playing video.
] button or press the [@]
yy On the remote control, press the Stop [
button in the launcher to immediately move to the live screen.
Recording does not work.
yy If your player does not display a Live image at all, that indicates recording
does not work so first check if you see an image on the screen.
yy Recording does not work if the recording settings are not properly configured.
1) Direct recording: press the [REC] button on the NVR remote control to start
recording immediately.
2) Scheduled recording: In menu/recording/scheduled recording, set the
desired recording time to start recording at that time.
-- <Continuous> recording: Must start recording at the time.
-- <Event> recording: When an event occurs (alarm, motion detection,
video loss), recording is started. If there is no event, there is no
recording.
-- <Continuous/event> recording: If there is no event, continuous
recording is done and when events occur, event recording is done.
The image quality of the recording data is not good.
168_ appendix
yy Increase the resolution and quality level in Menu – Record – Quality /
Resolution.
1)Resolution: Select a bigger size when specifying the recording size.
The recording image in the CIF format shows a deteriorated quality as
it is enlarged from a small-sized image.
2)Record Quality: Specify a bigger level for the recording quality.
yy If you increase the resolution and the recording quality, the data size
increases accordingly. So the HDD will be filled faster. Overwriting will
overwrite the existing data so recording will proceed at a shorter interval.
Problem
Action
yy If multiple profiles were applied to one camera for video transmission, the
actual video stream can be serviced by the camera at a lower frame rate than
specified.
Configure your camera to use one profile for data streaming as possible.
For example, if you set the same profile for recording and network profiles,
the actual recording is made at the specified frame rate.
Still, live video display using split screen mode may apply yet another profile
to camera in accordance with the used screen mode.
Note that allowed limit bitrate for recording / recording settings should be set
to be bigger values than that of camera's feed.
Recording is not performed in accordance with the
settings.
yy If the recording status shows that the input data is exceeded.
Then go to Menu – Recording – Recording Setting, and set the max data
capacity to greater than the input data.
The recording screen will slow down.
yy Check if the recording spec for each HDD condition (refer to the recording
setting in menu) is appropriate for the actual recording setting.
yy Only main video frames will play if the data data processing rate exceeds the
play performance (refer to the product specifications in menu).
English _169
● appendix
Frame rate of the actual recording does not match
that of configured to the camera.
Open Source License Report on the Product
The software included in this product contains copyrighted software that is licensed under the GPL, LGPL, zlib/libpng License, RSA MD4 or MD5
Message-Digest Algorithm License, PHP License 3.01, OpenSSL Combined License, MPL 1.1, MIT License, MIT Historical Permission License 3.0,
Microsoft Public License, JPEG License, GLUT for Win32 License, CodeIgniter License, Code Project Open 1.02 License, BSD 3-clause License, BSD
2-clause License, Apache 2.0 License, ISC License, Internet Society RFC, Brian Gladman Alternate License, Boost Software License 1.0, Curl License,
libxml2 License, NTP License, PCRE 5 License. You may obtain the complete Corresponding Source code from us for a period of three years after our
last shipment of this product by sending email to help.cctv@samsung.com
If you want to obtain the complete Corresponding Source code in the physical medium such as CD-ROM, the cost of physically performing source
distribution might be charged.
MM
`` For more details about Open Source, refer to the CD or Samsung Website.
• GPL Software: bonnie++ 1.03e, busybox 1.22.1, dibbler 0.8.4, Linux Kernel 3.4.35, mdadm 3.2.2, memtester 4.0.5, msmtp 1.4.21, parted 3.1,
smartmontools 5.37, uboot, udhcp 0.9.8, wget 1.14, wpa_supplicant 0.7.3, xfsprogs 3.1.11
• LGPL Software: ffmpeg 0.6.1, glibc 2.11.1, Live555, qtopia 4.7.2
• zlib/libpng Lisence: cximage, nisedit 2.0.3, Nullsoft Scriptable Install System 2.46, libpng, tinyxml 2.6.2, zlib
• RSA MD4 or MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm License: JavaScript MD5 1.1, sipxtapi
• PHP License 3.01: HPHP-2.1.0, PHP 5.2.0
• OpenSSL Combined License: OpenSSL 0.9.8a
• MPL 1.1: npapi-sdk
• MIT License: aptechcmsv2, avropendous, ccan, cjson, cJSON-Dave Gamble, dynatree, ie7-js, iniparser, javascript-ipv6, jqGrid, jQuery, jQuery UI,
jquery-form, jquery-hashchange 1.3, jquery-json, jquery-numeric, jquery-throttle-debounce 1.1, JS-Browser-Driver 0.2.0, moon9, noty, Raphael
JavaScript Library, wildflower 1.3.Beta
• MIT Historical Permission License 3.0: Android-Supertux
• Microsoft Public License: Minima, Text Designer Outline Text Library
• JPEG License: libjpeg-8b
• GLUT for Win32 License: GLUT for Win32
• CodeIgniter License: CodeIgniter
• Code Project Open 1.02 License: CPPPSQLite - C++ Wrapper for SQLite, A reusable, high performance, socket server class - Part3
• BSD 3-clause License: Disk Station GPL Source - Synology NAS GPL Source, jquery.sha256, jsbn, libjpeg-turbo, lighttpd 1.4.35, miniupnpc 1.5,
msinttypes, net-snmp 5.6.2, pppd 2.4.5, Spheral++, sprintf 0.7, The OpenGL Extension Wrangler Library 1.7.0
• BSD 2-clause License: Capsicum - practical capabilities for UNIX
• Apache 2.0 License: GLUEMan – glueman – provider, RLLib
• ISC License: dhcp 4.3-2rc2
• Internet Society RFC: IETF RFC Collection rfc3550
• Brian Gladman Alternate License: AES with the VIA ACE
• Boost Software License 1.0: boost 1.43.0
• Curl License: curl 7.21.0
• libxml2 License: libxml2 2.7.7
• NTP License: ntp 4.2.6p1
• PCRE 5 License: pcre 8.31
Acknowledgement
This product includes modified version of ffmpeg, Live555, qtopia 4.7.2, and npapi-sdk.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this
license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom
to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is
intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software-to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public
License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s software and
to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other
Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library
General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price.
Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have
the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want
it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free
programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to
deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These
restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute
copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis
or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You
must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And
you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2)
offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute
and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that
everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If
the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its
recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any
problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors’
reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents.
We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will
individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program
proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must
be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a
notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under
the terms of this General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to
any such program or work, and a “work based on the Program” means
either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to
say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or
with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter,
translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.) Each
licensee is addressed as “you”.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running
the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is
covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program
(independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether
that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source
code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously
and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice
and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this
License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other
recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you
may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of
it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute
such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided
that you also meet all of these conditions:
a)You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating
that you changed the files and the date of any change.
b)You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part
thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties
under the terms of this License.
c)If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive
use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement
including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no
warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users
may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the
user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program
itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement,
your work based on the Program is not required to print an
announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable
sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be
reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves,
then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when
you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the
same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program,
the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose
permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to
each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your
rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the
right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on
the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the
scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a)Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1
and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b)Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to
give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically
performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of
the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of
Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,
c)Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to
distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only
for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in
object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with
Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special
exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to
copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy
the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the
source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the
source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise
to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will
automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties
who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not
have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full
compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed
it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute
the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if
you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing
the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your
acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for
copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original
licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms
and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the
recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible
for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute
so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and
any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not
distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not
permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive
copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could
satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from
distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any
particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply
and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents
or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims;
this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system, which is implemented by public license
practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide
range of software distributed through that system in reliance on
consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to
decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other
system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be
a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain
countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original
copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an
explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so
that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if
written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new
versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in
detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any
later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions
either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number
of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we
sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the
two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free
software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE,
THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER
PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU.
SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR
AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY
OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR
LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF
THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN
IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free
software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to
attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the
exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright”
line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the program’s name and an idea of what it does.
Copyright (C) yyyy name of author
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the
Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your
option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See
the GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper
mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it
starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision
comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w’.
This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain
conditions; type `show c’ for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w’ and `show c’ should show the
appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands
you use may be called something other than `show w’ and `show c’; they
could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if
necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
`Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers) written by James
Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program
into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you
may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with
the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General
Public License instead of this License.
GNU General Public License
Version 3, 29 June 2007
Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this
license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software
and other kinds of works.
The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to
take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the
GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to
share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free
software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the
GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to
any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your
programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price.
Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have
the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if
you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that
you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs,
and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these
rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain
responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it:
responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis
or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that
you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
rights.
Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1)
assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you
legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it.
For the developers’ and authors’ protection, the GPL clearly explains that
there is no warranty for this free software. For both users’ and authors’
sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so
that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of
previous versions.
Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run
modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer
can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting
users’ freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such
abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is
precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed
this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such
problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend
this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed
to protect the freedom of users.
Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents.
States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of
software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish
to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could
make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that
patents cannot be used to render the program non-free.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
0. Definitions.
“This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.
“Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of
works, such as semiconductor masks.
“The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this
License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees” and
“recipients” may be individuals or organizations.
To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in
a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an
exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier
work or a work “based on” the earlier work.
A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based
on the Program.
To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without
permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement
under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or
modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with
or without modification), making available to the public, and in some
countries other activities as well.
To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other
parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a
computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying.
An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the
extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1)
displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there
is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are
provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and
how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user
commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list
meets this criterion.
1. Source Code.
The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for
making modifications to it. “Object code” means any non-source form of
a work.
A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official
standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of
interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is
widely used among developers working in that language.
The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other
than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of
packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major
Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that
Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an
implementation is available to the public in source code form. A “Major
Component”, in this context, means a major essential component
(kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if
any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce
the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it.
The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all
the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work)
run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control
those activities. However, it does not include the work’s System Libraries,
or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are
used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of
the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface
definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source
code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the
work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data
communication or control flow between those subprograms and other
parts of the work.
The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can
regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source.
The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same
work.
2. Basic Permissions.
All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright
on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are
met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the
unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered
by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered
work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other
equivalent, as provided by copyright law.
You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not
convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in
force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of
having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with
facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the
terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not
control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for
you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and
control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your
copyrighted material outside their relationship with you.
Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the
conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it
unnecessary.
3. Protecting Users’ Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.
No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological
measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of
the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar
laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures.
When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid
circumvention of technological measures to the extent such
circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with
respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit
operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against
the work’s users, your or third parties’ legal rights to forbid circumvention
of technological measures.
4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.
You may convey verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you
receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice;
keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non-permissive
terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all
notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of
this License along with the Program.
You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and
you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee.
5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.
You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to
produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms
of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a)The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it,
and giving a relevant date.
b)The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released
under this License and any conditions added under section 7. This
requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to “keep intact all
notices”.
c)You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to
anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License will
therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms,
to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are
packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any
other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have
separately received it.
d)If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display
Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive
interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work
need not make them do so.
A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent
works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and
which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on
a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if
the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the
access or legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the
individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate
does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate.
6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.
You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of
sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable
Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these
ways:
a)Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
(including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the
Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily
used for software interchange.
b)Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
(including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written
offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer
spare parts or customer support for that product model, to give
anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the
Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is
covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily
used for software interchange, for a price no more than your
reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or
(2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at
no charge.
c)Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the
written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is
allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you
received the object code with such an offer, in accord with subsection
6b.
d)Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place
(gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the
Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no
further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the
Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy
the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may
be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports
equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions
next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding
Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source,
you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as
needed to satisfy these requirements.
e)Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided
you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding
Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no
charge under subsection 6d.
A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded
from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be
included in conveying the object code work.
A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any
tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or
household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation
into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product,
doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular
product received by a particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical
or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the
particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or
expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer
product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial,
industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the only
significant mode of use of the product.
“Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods,
procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install
and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product
from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information
must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified
object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because
modification has been made.
If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or
specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part
of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User
Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term
(regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding
Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the
Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you
nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the
User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM).
The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a
requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates
for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the
User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a
network may be denied when the modification itself materially and
adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and
protocols for communication across the network.
Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided,
in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly
documented (and with an implementation available to the public in
source code form), and must require no special password or key for
unpacking, reading or copying.
7. Additional Terms.
“Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this
License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions.
Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be
treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that
they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to
part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those
permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License
without regard to the additional permissions.
When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option
remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it.
(Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in
certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional
permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you
have or can give appropriate copyright permission.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add
to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that
material) supplement the terms of this License with terms:
a)Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of
sections 15 and 16 of this License; or
b)Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or
author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices
displayed by works containing it; or
c)Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or
requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in
reasonable ways as different from the original version; or
d)Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or
authors of the material; or
e)Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade
names, trademarks, or service marks; or
f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material
by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with
contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that
these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and
authors.
All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further
restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you
received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed
by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may
remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but
permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a
covered work material governed by the terms of that license document,
provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or
conveying.
If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must
place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that
apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable
terms.
Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the
form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above
requirements apply either way.
8. Termination.
You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly
provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or
modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this
License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph
of section 11).
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from
a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until
the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b)
permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by
some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated
permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some
reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of
violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you
cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the
licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under
this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently
reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same
material under section 10.
9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.
You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a
copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring
solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a
copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than
this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered
work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License.
Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate
your acceptance of this License to do so.
10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.
Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and
propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for
enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an
organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an
organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work
results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who
receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work
the party’s predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous
paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of
the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or
can get it with reasonable efforts.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights
granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not
impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights
granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a
cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is
infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the
Program or any portion of it.
11. Patents.
A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this
License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The
work thus licensed is called the contributor’s “contributor version”.
A contributor’s “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned or
controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter
acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this
License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not
include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further
modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition,
“control” includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner
consistent with the requirements of this License.
Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free
patent license under the contributor’s essential patent claims, to make,
use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate
the contents of its contributor version.
In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express
agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a
patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant
not to sue for patent infringement). To “grant” such a patent license to a
party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce
a patent against the party.
If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and
the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to
copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a
publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then
you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available,
or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for
this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the
requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream
recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have actual knowledge that,
but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country,
or your recipient’s use of the covered work in a country, would infringe
one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to
believe are valid.
If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement,
you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work,
and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered
work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific
copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is
automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works
based on it.
A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope
of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the
non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted
under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party
to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing
software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the
extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third
party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work
from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of
the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies),
or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or
compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that
arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March
2007.
Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any
implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be
available to you under applicable patent law.
12. No Surrender of Others’ Freedom.
If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a
covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate
you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you
convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms
and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program.
13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission
to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version
3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work,
and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue
to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special
requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13,
concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination
as such.
14. Revised Versions of this License.
The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions
will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public
License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of
following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the
Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public
License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of
the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy’s public
statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to
choose that version for the Program.
Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions.
However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or
copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version.
15. Disclaimer of Warranty.
THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER
PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU.
SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. Limitation of Liability.
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED
TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER
PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING
ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA
BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH
ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.
If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot
be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall
apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil
liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of
liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New
Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free
software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to
attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the
exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright”
line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the program’s name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the
Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your
option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper
mail.
If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like
this when it starts in an interactive mode:
<program> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
type `show w’.
This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain
conditions; type `show c’ for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w’ and `show c’ should show the
appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your
program’s commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would
use an “about box”.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or
school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if
necessary. For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the
GNU GPL, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your
program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine
library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary
applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU
Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first, please
read <http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>.
GNU Lesser General Public License
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this
license document, but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the
successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the
version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom
to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses
are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially
designated software packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software
Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too,
but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the
ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any
particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not
price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you
want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free
programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these
rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a
fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You
must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you
link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to
the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making
changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these
terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the
library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission
to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no
warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone
else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is
not the original version, so that the original author’s reputation will not be
affected by problems that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any
free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively
restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from
a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for
a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use
specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary
GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public
License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from
the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain
libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a
shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined
work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public
License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits
its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more
lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does
Less to protect the user’s freedom than the ordinary General Public
License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an
advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are
the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries.
However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special
circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to
encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes
a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed
to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the
same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to
gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser
General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs
enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software.
For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs
enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as
well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the
users’ freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked
with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program
using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a “work
based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”. The former
contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be
combined with the library in order to run.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other
program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other
authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this
Lesser General Public License (also called “this License”). Each licensee
is addressed as “you”.
A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared
so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use
some of those functions and data) to form executables.
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which
has been distributed under these terms. A “work based on the Library”
means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that
is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim
or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another
language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the
term “modification”.)
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for
making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all
the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface
definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation
of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a
program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a
program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it).
Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the
program that uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete
source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices
that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and
distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you
may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it,
thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such
modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that
you also meet all of these conditions:
a)The modified work must itself be a software library.
b)You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating
that you changed the files and the date of any change.
c)You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge
to all third parties under the terms of this License.
d)If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data
to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other
than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must
make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does
not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs
whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a
purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application.
Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function
or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does
not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable
sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be
reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves,
then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when
you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the
same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library,
the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose
permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to
each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your
rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the
right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on
the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library
with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a
storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the
scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public
License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this,
you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer
to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this
License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General
Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if
you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy,
so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent
copies and derivative works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the
Library into a program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it,
under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the
complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a
designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source
code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the
source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the
source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but
is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is
called a “work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a
derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this
License.
However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates
an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains
portions of the Library), rather than a “work that uses the library”. The
executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms
for distribution of such executables.
When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that
is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative
work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is
true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library,
or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not
precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure
layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten
lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted,
regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing
this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the
object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables
containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are
linked directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link
a “work that uses the Library” with the Library to produce a work
containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of
your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for
the customer’s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such
modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the
Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this
License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during
execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright
notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the
user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:
a)Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machinereadable source code for the Library including whatever changes were
used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2
above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with
the complete machine-readable “work that uses the Library”, as object
code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and
then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified
Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of
definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile
the application to use the modified definitions.)
b)Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library.
A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the
library already present on the user’s computer system, rather than
copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate
properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one,
as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version
that the work was made with.
c)Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three
years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a,
above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this
distribution.
d)If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a
designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified
materials from the same place.
e)Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or
that you have already sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library”
must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the
executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be
distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either
source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and
so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that
component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of
other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating
system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the
Library together in an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library
side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not
covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided
that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the
other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do
these two things:
a)Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work
based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This
must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
b)Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part
of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the
accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the
Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is
void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed
it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute
the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if
you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing
the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your
acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for
copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the
Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original
licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to
these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions
on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not
responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute
so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and
any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not
distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not
permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive
copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could
satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from
distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any
particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply,
and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents
or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims;
this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system which is implemented by public license
practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide
range of software distributed through that system in reliance on
consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to
decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other
system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be
a consequence of the rest of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain
countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original
copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an
explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so
that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if
written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such
new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ
in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library
specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any
later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions
either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version
number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs
whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the
author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the
Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we
sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the
two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free
software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE
IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN
WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
PROVIDE THE LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE
QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU.
SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST
OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED
TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY
WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING
ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY
(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING
RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD
PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY
OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New
Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest
possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that
everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting
redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the
ordinary General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is
safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
“copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the library’s name and an idea of what it does.
Copyright (C) year name of author
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the
Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your
option) any later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See
the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library, if necessary.
Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob’
(a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
The zlib/libpng License
Copyright (c) 2011 Lee Thomason
Copyright (c) 1995-2012 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
Copyright (c) 1998-2012 Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Copyright (c) 2003-2005 Hector Mauricio Rodriguez Segura
Copyright (c) 1995-2009 Nullsoft and Contributors
Copyright (c) 2002-2008 Davide Pizzolato
Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders>
This software is provided ‘as-is’, without any express or implied warranty.
In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from
the use of this software.;
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose,
including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely,
subject to the following restrictions:
4. Products derived from this software may not be called “PHP”, nor may
“PHP” appear in their name, without prior written permission from
group@php.net. You may indicate that your software works in
conjunction with PHP by saying “Foo for PHP” instead of calling it “PHP
Foo” or “phpfoo”
5. The PHP Group may publish revised and/or new versions of the
license from time to time. Each version will be given a distinguishing
version number. Once covered code has been published under a
particular version of the license, you may always continue to use it under
the terms of that version. You may also choose to use such covered
code under the terms of any subsequent version of the license published
by the PHP Group. No one other than the PHP Group has the right to
modify the terms applicable to covered code created under this License.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
acknowledgment:
“This product includes PHP software, freely available from {http://www.
php.net/software/}”.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PHP DEVELOPMENT TEAM
“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PHP DEVELOPMENT
TEAM OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not
claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a
product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be
appreciated but is not required.
------------------------------------------------------------
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
PHP includes the Zend Engine, freely available at {http://www.zend.
com}.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not
be misrepresented as being the original software.
RSA MD4 or MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm
License
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is
identified as the “RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 or MD5 Message-Digest
Algorithm” in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this
function.
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that
such works are identified as “derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc.
MD4 or MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm” in all material mentioning or
referencing the derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the
merchantability of this software or the suitability of this software for any
particular purpose. It is provided “as is” without express or implied
warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this
documentation and/or software.
The PHP License, version 3.01
Copyright (c) 1999 - 2006 The PHP Group. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, is permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name “PHP” must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written permission. For written
permission, please contact group@php.net.
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many
individuals on behalf of the PHP Group.
The PHP Group can be contacted via Email at group@php.net.
For more information on the PHP Group and the PHP project, please see
{http://www.php.net}.
LICENSE ISSUES
==============
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions
of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the
toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are
BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to
OpenSSL please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
OpenSSL License
---------------
====================================================
Copyright (c) 1998-2008 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
must display the following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
prior written permission. For written permission, please contact opensslcore@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor
may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission
of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS”
AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
====================================================
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
-----------------------
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@
cryptsoft.com).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the
following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all
code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc.,
code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this
distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder
is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and
as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
as the author of the parts of the library used.
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in
documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
must display the following acknowledgement:
“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com)”
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library
being used are not cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
the apps directory (application code) you must include an
acknowledgement: “This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply
be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU
Public Licence.]
MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 1.1
________________________________________
1. Definitions.
1.0.1. “Commercial Use” means distribution or otherwise making the
Covered Code available to a third party.
1.1. ‘’Contributor’’ means each entity that creates or contributes to
the creation of Modifications.
1.2. ‘’Contributor Version’’ means the combination of the Original
Code, prior Modifications used by a Contributor, and the Modifications
made by that particular Contributor.
1.3. ‘’Covered Code’’ means the Original Code or Modifications or
the combination of the Original Code and Modifications, in each case
including portions thereof.
1.4. ‘’Electronic Distribution Mechanism’’ means a mechanism
generally accepted in the software development community for the
electronic transfer of data.
1.5. ‘’Executable’’ means Covered Code in any form other than
Source Code.
1.6. ‘’Initial Developer’’ means the individual or entity identified as the
Initial Developer in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit A.
1.7. ‘’Larger Work’’ means a work which combines Covered Code or
portions thereof with code not governed by the terms of this License.
1.8. ‘’License’’ means this document.
1.8.1. “Licensable” means having the right to grant, to the maximum
extent possible, whether at the time of the initial grant or subsequently
acquired, any and all of the rights conveyed herein.
1.9. ‘’Modifications’’ means any addition to or deletion from the
substance or structure of either the Original Code or any previous
Modifications. When Covered Code is released as a series of files, a
Modification is:
A. Any addition to or deletion from the contents of a file containing
Original Code or previous Modifications.
B. Any new file that contains any part of the Original Code or
previous Modifications.
1.10. ‘’Original Code’’ means Source Code of computer software
code which is described in the Source Code notice required by
Exhibit A as Original Code, and which, at the time of its release under
this License is not already Covered Code governed by this License.
1.10.1. “Patent Claims” means any patent claim(s), now owned or
hereafter acquired, including without limitation, method, process, and
apparatus claims, in any patent Licensable by grantor.
1.11. ‘’Source Code’’ means the preferred form of the Covered Code
for making modifications to it, including all modules it contains, plus
any associated interface definition files, scripts used to control
compilation and installation of an Executable, or source code
differential comparisons against either the Original Code or another
well known, available Covered Code of the Contributor’s choice. The
Source Code can be in a compressed or archival form, provided the
appropriate decompression or de-archiving software is widely available
for no charge.
1.12. “You’’ (or “Your”) means an individual or a legal entity exercising
rights under, and complying with all of the terms of, this License or a
future version of this License issued under Section 6.1. For legal
entities, “You’’ includes any entity which controls, is controlled by, or is
under common control with You. For purposes of this definition,
“control’’ means (a) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction
or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (b)
ownership of more than fifty percent (50%) of the outstanding shares or
beneficial ownership of such entity.
2. Source Code License.
2.1. The Initial Developer Grant. The Initial Developer hereby grants
You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license, subject to third
party intellectual property claims:
(a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark)
Licensable by Initial Developer to use, reproduce, modify, display,
perform, sublicense and distribute the Original Code (or portions
thereof) with or without Modifications, and/or as part of a Larger
Work; and
(b) under Patents Claims infringed by the making, using or selling
of Original Code, to make, have made, use, practice, sell, and
offer for sale, and/or otherwise dispose of the Original Code (or
portions thereof).
(c) the licenses granted in this Section 2.1(a) and (b) are effective
on the date Initial Developer first distributes Original Code under
the terms of this License.
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.1(b) above, no patent license is
granted: 1) for code that You delete from the Original Code; 2)
separate from the Original Code; or 3) for infringements caused
by: i) the modification of the Original Code or ii) the combination
of the Original Code with other software or devices.
2.2. Contributor Grant. Subject to third party intellectual property
claims, each Contributor hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free,
non-exclusive license
(a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or
trademark) Licensable by Contributor, to use, reproduce,
modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the
Modifications created by such Contributor (or portions thereof)
either on an unmodified basis, with other Modifications, as
Covered Code and/or as part of a Larger Work; and
(b) under Patent Claims infringed by the making, using, or selling of
Modifications made by that Contributor either alone and/or in
combination with its Contributor Version (or portions of such
combination), to make, use, sell, offer for sale, have made, and/
or otherwise dispose of: 1) Modifications made by that
Contributor (or portions thereof); and 2) the combination of
Modifications made by that Contributor with its Contributor
Version (or portions of such combination).
(c) the licenses granted in Sections 2.2(a) and 2.2(b) are effective
on the date Contributor first makes Commercial Use of the
Covered Code.
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.2(b) above, no patent license is
granted: 1) for any code that Contributor has deleted from the
Contributor Version; 2) separate from the Contributor Version;
3) for infringements caused by: i) third party modifications of
Contributor Version or ii) the combination of Modifications
made by that Contributor with other software (except as part of
the Contributor Version) or other devices; or 4) under Patent
Claims infringed by Covered Code in the absence of
Modifications made by that Contributor.
3. Distribution Obligations.
3.1. Application of License. The Modifications which You create or to
which You contribute are governed by the terms of this License,
including without limitation Section 2.2. The Source Code version of
Covered Code may be distributed only under the terms of this License
or a future version of this License released under Section 6.1, and You
must include a copy of this License with every copy of the Source
Code You distribute. You may not offer or impose any terms on any
Source Code version that alters or restricts the applicable version of
this License or the recipients’ rights hereunder. However, You may
include an additional document offering the additional rights described
in Section 3.5.
3.2. Availability of Source Code. Any Modification which You create
or to which You contribute must be made available in Source Code
form under the terms of this License either on the same media as an
Executable version or via an accepted Electronic Distribution
Mechanism to anyone to whom you made an Executable version
available; and if made available via Electronic Distribution Mechanism,
must remain available for at least twelve (12) months after the date it
initially became available, or at least six (6) months after a subsequent
version of that particular Modification has been made available to such
recipients. You are responsible for ensuring that the Source Code
version remains available even if the Electronic Distribution Mechanism
is maintained by a third party.
3.3. Description of Modifications. You must cause all Covered Code
to which You contribute to contain a file documenting the changes You
made to create that Covered Code and the date of any change. You
must include a prominent statement that the Modification is derived,
directly or indirectly, from Original Code provided by the Initial
Developer and including the name of the Initial Developer in (a) the
Source Code, and (b) in any notice in an Executable version or related
documentation in which You describe the origin or ownership of the
Covered Code.
3.4. Intellectual Property Matters
(a) Third Party Claims. If Contributor has knowledge that a license
under a third party’s intellectual property rights is required to
exercise the rights granted by such Contributor under Sections
2.1 or 2.2, Contributor must include a text file with the Source
Code distribution titled “LEGAL’’ which describes the claim and
the party making the claim in sufficient detail that a recipient will
know whom to contact. If Contributor obtains such knowledge
after the Modification is made available as described in Section
3.2, Contributor shall promptly modify the LEGAL file in all copies
Contributor makes available thereafter and shall take other steps
(such as notifying appropriate mailing lists or newsgroups)
reasonably calculated to inform those who received the Covered
Code that new knowledge has been obtained.
(b) Contributor APIs. If Contributor’s Modifications include an
application programming interface and Contributor has
knowledge of patent licenses which are reasonably necessary
to implement that API, Contributor must also include this
information in the LEGAL file.
(c) Representations.
Contributor represents that, except as disclosed pursuant to
Section 3.4(a) above, Contributor believes that Contributor’s
Modifications are Contributor’s original creation(s) and/or
Contributor has sufficient rights to grant the rights conveyed by
this License.
3.5. Required Notices. You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in
each file of the Source Code. If it is not possible to put such notice in a
particular Source Code file due to its structure, then You must include
such notice in a location (such as a relevant directory) where a user would
be likely to look for such a notice. If You created one or more
Modification(s) You may add your name as a Contributor to the notice
described in Exhibit A. You must also duplicate this License in any
documentation for the Source Code where You describe recipients’ rights
or ownership rights relating to Covered Code. You may choose to offer,
and to charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations
to one or more recipients of Covered Code. However, You may do so
only on Your own behalf, and not on behalf of the Initial Developer or any
Contributor. You must make it absolutely clear than any such warranty,
support, indemnity or liability obligation is offered by You alone, and You
hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for
any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result
of warranty, support, indemnity or liability terms You offer.
3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions. You may distribute
Covered Code in Executable form only if the requirements of Section
3.1-3.5 have been met for that Covered Code, and if You include a
notice stating that the Source Code version of the Covered Code is
available under the terms of this License, including a description of
how and where You have fulfilled the obligations of Section 3.2. The
notice must be conspicuously included in any notice in an Executable
version, related documentation or collateral in which You describe
recipients’ rights relating to the Covered Code. You may distribute the
Executable version of Covered Code or ownership rights under a
license of Your choice, which may contain terms different from this
License, provided that You are in compliance with the terms of this
License and that the license for the Executable version does not
attempt to limit or alter the recipient’s rights in the Source Code
version from the rights set forth in this License. If You distribute the
Executable version under a different license You must make it
absolutely clear that any terms which differ from this License are
offered by You alone, not by the Initial Developer or any Contributor.
You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every
Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such
Contributor as a result of any such terms You offer.
3.7. Larger Works. You may create a Larger Work by combining
Covered Code with other code not governed by the terms of this
License and distribute the Larger Work as a single product. In such a
case, You must make sure the requirements of this License are fulfilled
for the Covered Code.
4. Inability to Comply Due to Statute or Regulation.
If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the terms of this License
with respect to some or all of the Covered Code due to statute, judicial
order, or regulation then You must: (a) comply with the terms of this
License to the maximum extent possible; and (b) describe the limitations
and the code they affect. Such description must be included in the
LEGAL file described in Section 3.4 and must be included with all
distributions of the Source Code. Except to the extent prohibited by
statute or regulation, such description must be sufficiently detailed for a
recipient of ordinary skill to be able to understand it.
5. Application of this License.
This License applies to code to which the Initial Developer has attached
the notice in Exhibit A and to related Covered Code.
6. Versions of the License.
6.1. New Versions. Netscape Communications Corporation (‘’Netscape’’)
may publish revised and/or new versions of the License from time to time.
Each version will be given a distinguishing version number.
6.2. Effect of New Versions. Once Covered Code has been published
under a particular version of the License, You may always continue to use
it under the terms of that version. You may also choose to use such
Covered Code under the terms of any subsequent version of the License
published by Netscape. No one other than Netscape has the right to
modify the terms applicable to Covered Code created under this License.
6.3. Derivative Works. If You create or use a modified version of this
License (which you may only do in order to apply it to code which is not
already Covered Code governed by this License), You must (a) rename
Your license so that the phrases ‘’Mozilla’’, ‘’MOZILLAPL’’, ‘’MOZPL’’,
‘’Netscape’’, “MPL”, ‘’NPL’’ or any confusingly similar phrase do not
appear in your license (except to note that your license differs from this
License) and (b) otherwise make it clear that Your version of the license
contains terms which differ from the Mozilla Public License and
Netscape Public License. (Filling in the name of the Initial Developer,
Original Code or Contributor in the notice described in Exhibit A shall
not of themselves be deemed to be modifications of this License.)
7. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED
UNDER THIS LICENSE ON AN “AS IS’’ BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE COVERED CODE IS
FREE OF DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE
QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY
RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL DEVELOPER OR ANY OTHER
CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF
WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE.
NO USE OF ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER
EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.
8. TERMINATION.
8.1. This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate
automatically if You fail to comply with terms herein and fail to cure
such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of the breach. All
sublicenses to the Covered Code which are properly granted shall
survive any termination of this License. Provisions which, by their
nature, must remain in effect beyond the termination of this License
shall survive.
8.2. If You initiate litigation by asserting a patent infringement claim
(excluding declatory judgment actions) against Initial Developer or a
Contributor (the Initial Developer or Contributor against whom You file
such action is referred to as “Participant”) alleging that:
(a) such Participant’s Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes
any patent, then any and all rights granted by such Participant to
You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 of this License shall, upon 60
days notice from Participant terminate prospectively, unless if
within 60 days after receipt of notice You either: (i) agree in writing
to pay Participant a mutually agreeable reasonable royalty for Your
past and future use of Modifications made by such Participant, or
(ii) withdraw Your litigation claim with respect to the Contributor
Version against such Participant. If within 60 days of notice, a
reasonable royalty and payment arrangement are not mutually
agreed upon in writing by the parties or the litigation claim is not
withdrawn, the rights granted by Participant to You under Sections
2.1 and/or 2.2 automatically terminate at the expiration of the 60
day notice period specified above.
(b) any software, hardware, or device, other than such Participant’s
Contributor Version, directly or indirectly infringes any patent,
then any rights granted to You by such Participant under
Sections 2.1(b) and 2.2(b) are revoked effective as of the date
You first made, used, sold, distributed, or had made,
Modifications made by that Participant.
8.3. If You assert a patent infringement claim against Participant
alleging that such Participant’s Contributor Version directly or indirectly
infringes any patent where such claim is resolved (such as by license
or settlement) prior to the initiation of patent infringement litigation,
then the reasonable value of the licenses granted by such Participant
under Sections 2.1 or 2.2 shall be taken into account in determining
the amount or value of any payment or license.
8.4. In the event of termination under Sections 8.1 or 8.2 above, all
end user license agreements (excluding distributors and resellers)
which have been validly granted by You or any distributor hereunder
prior to termination shall survive termination.
9. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND
UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL YOU, THE
INITIAL DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY
DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF
SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY
CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR
LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR
MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES
OR LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF
LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR
PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY’S NEGLIGENCE
TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION.
SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO
THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
10. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS.
The Covered Code is a ‘’commercial item,’’ as that term is defined in 48
C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of ‘’commercial computer software’’
and ‘’commercial computer software documentation,’’ as such terms are
used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212
and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S.
Government End Users acquire Covered Code with only those rights set
forth herein.
11. MISCELLANEOUS.
This License represents the complete agreement concerning subject
matter hereof. If any provision of this License is held to be unenforceable,
such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it
enforceable. This License shall be governed by California law provisions
(except to the extent applicable law, if any, provides otherwise), excluding
its conflict-of-law provisions. With respect to disputes in which at least
one party is a citizen of, or an entity chartered or registered to do
business in the United States of America, any litigation relating to this
License shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts of the
Northern District of California, with venue lying in Santa Clara County,
California, with the losing party responsible for costs, including without
limitation, court costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses. The
application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded. Any law or regulation
which provides that the language of a contract shall be construed
against the drafter shall not apply to this License.
12. RESPONSIBILITY FOR CLAIMS.
As between Initial Developer and the Contributors, each party is
responsible for claims and damages arising, directly or indirectly, out of
its utilization of rights under this License and You agree to work with Initial
Developer and Contributors to distribute such responsibility on an
equitable basis. Nothing herein is intended or shall be deemed to
constitute any admission of liability.
13. MULTIPLE-LICENSED CODE.
Initial Developer may designate portions of the Covered Code as
Multiple-Licensed. Multiple-Licensedmeans that the Initial Developer
permits you to utilize portions of the Covered Code under Your choice of
the MPL or the alternative licenses, if any, specified by the Initial
Developer in the file described in Exhibit A.
EXHIBIT A -Mozilla Public License.
``The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version
1.1 (the “License”); you may not use this file except in compliance with
the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.mozilla.
org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” basis,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the
License for the specific language governing rights and limitations under
the License.
The Original Code is ______________________________________.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is ________________________.
Portions created by ______________________ are Copyright (C) ______
_______________________. All Rights Reserved.
Contributor(s): ______________________________________.
Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of the
_____ license (the [___] License), in which case the provisions of [______]
License are applicable instead of those above. If you wish to allow use
of your version of this file only under the terms of the [____] License and
not to allow others to use your version of this file under the MPL, indicate
your decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with
the notice and other provisions required by the [___] License. If you do
not delete the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this
file under either the MPL or the [___] License.”
[NOTE: The text of this Exhibit A may differ slightly from the text of the
notices in the Source Code files of the Original Code. You should use the
text of this Exhibit A rather than the text found in the Original Code
Source Code for Your Modifications.]
The MIT License
Copyright (c) 2008-2010 Adrian Tosca
Copyright (c) 2010-2011 Ittrium LLC
Copyright (c) 2004, 2005 Metaparadigm Pte Ltd
Copyright (c) 2009 Dave Gamble
Copyright (c) 2008-2011 Martin Wendt
Copyright (c) 2004-2010 Dean Edwards
Copyright (c) 2000-2011 by Nicolas Devillard
Copyright (c) 2011 Beau Gunderson
Copyright (c) 2008 Tony Tomov
Copyright (c) 2007,2014 jQuery Foundation and other contributors
Copyright (c) 2010 “Cowboy” Ben Alman
Copyright (c) 2009-2011 Brantley Harris
Copyright (c) 2010-2014 Timo Tijhof
Copyright (c) 2012 Performance Horizon Group
Copyright (c) 2012 Nedim Arabac
Copyright (c) 2008-2012 Dmitry Baranovskiy
Copyright (c) 2008-2012 Sencha Labs
Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders>
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”),
to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software
is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
MIT Historical Permission License 3
Copyright 1987 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation, and that the name of M.I.T. not be used in
advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without
specific, written prior permission. M.I.T. makes no representations about
the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided “as is”
without express or implied warranty.
Microsoft Public License (Ms-PL)
This license governs use of the accompanying software. If you use the
software, you accept this license. If you do not accept the license, do not
use the software.
1. Definitions
The terms “reproduce,” “reproduction,” “derivative works,” and
“distribution” have the same meaning here as under U.S. copyright law.
A “contribution” is the original software, or any additions or changes to
the software.
A “contributor” is any person that distributes its contribution under this
license.
“Licensed patents” are a contributor’s patent claims that read directly on
its contribution.
2. Grant of Rights
A.Copyright Grant- Subject to the terms of this license, including the
license conditions and limitations in section 3, each contributor grants
you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free copyright license to
reproduce its contribution, prepare derivative works of its contribution,
and distribute its contribution or any derivative works that you create.
B.Patent Grant- Subject to the terms of this license, including the
license conditions and limitations in section 3, each contributor grants
you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free license under its licensed
patents to make, have made, use, sell, offer for sale, import, and/or
otherwise dispose of its contribution in the software or derivative
works of the contribution in the software.
3. Conditions and Limitations
A.No Trademark License- This license does not grant you rights to
use any contributors’ name, logo, or trademarks.
B.If you bring a patent claim against any contributor over patents that
you claim are infringed by the software, your patent license from such
contributor to the software ends automatically.
C.If you distribute any portion of the software, you must retain all
copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices that are present
in the software.
D.If you distribute any portion of the software in source code form,
you may do so only under this license by including a complete copy of
this license with your distribution. If you distribute any portion of the
software in compiled or object code form, you may only do so under a
license that complies with this license.
E.The software is licensed “as-is.” You bear the risk of using it. The
contributors give no express warranties, guarantees or conditions. You
may have additional consumer rights under your local laws which this
license cannot change. To the extent permitted under your local laws,
the contributors exclude the implied warranties of merchantability,
fitness for a particular purpose and non-infringement.
The Independent JPEG Group’s JPEG software
README for release 6b of 27-Mar-1998
====================================
This distribution contains the sixth public release of the Independent
JPEG Group’s free JPEG software. You are welcome to redistribute this
software and to use it for any purpose, subject to the conditions under
LEGAL ISSUES, below.
Serious users of this software (particularly those incorporating it into
larger programs) should contact IJG at jpeg-info@uunet.uu.net to be
added to our electronic mailing list. Mailing list members are notified of
updates and have a chance to participate in technical discussions, etc.
This software is the work of Tom Lane, Philip Gladstone, Jim Boucher,
Lee Crocker, Julian Minguillon, Luis Ortiz, George Phillips, Davide Rossi,
Guido Vollbeding, Ge’ Weijers, and other members of the Independent
JPEG Group.
IJG is not affiliated with the official ISO JPEG standards committee.
LEGAL ISSUES
============
In plain English:
1. We don’t promise that this software works. (But if you find any bugs,
please let us know!)
2. You can use this software for whatever you want. You don’t have to
pay us.
3. You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it in a
program, you must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that
you’ve used the IJG code.
In legalese:
The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, either express or
implied, with respect to this software, its quality, accuracy, merchantability,
or fitness for a particular purpose. This software is provided “AS IS”, and
you, its user, assume the entire risk as to its quality and accuracy.
This software is copyright (C) 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane. All Rights
Reserved except as specified below.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this
software (or portions thereof) for any purpose, without fee, subject to
these conditions:
(1) If any part of the source code for this software is distributed, then this
README file must be included, with this copyright and no-warranty
notice unaltered; and any additions, deletions, or changes to the original
files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation.
(2) If only executable code is distributed, then the accompanying
documentation must state that “this software is based in part on the
work of the Independent JPEG Group”.
(3) Permission for use of this software is granted only if the user accepts
full responsibility for any undesirable consequences; the authors accept
NO LIABILITY for damages of any kind.
These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the IJG
code, not just to the unmodified library. If you use our work, you ought to
acknowledge us.
Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author’s name or
company name in advertising or publicity relating to this software or
products derived from it. This software may be referred to only as “the
Independent JPEG Group’s software”.
We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the
basis of commercial products, provided that all warranty or liability claims
are assumed by the product vendor.
ansi2knr.c is included in this distribution by permission of L. Peter
Deutsch, sole proprietor of its copyright holder, Aladdin Enterprises of
Menlo Park, CA. ansi2knr.c is NOT covered by the above copyright and
conditions, but instead by the usual distribution terms of the Free
Software Foundation; principally, that you must include source code if
you redistribute it. (See the file ansi2knr.c for full details.) However, since
ansi2knr.c is not needed as part of any program generated from the IJG
code, this does not limit you more than the foregoing paragraphs do.
The Unix configuration script “configure” was produced with GNU
Autoconf. It is copyright by the Free Software Foundation but is freely
distributable. The same holds for its supporting scripts (config.guess,
config.sub, ltconfig, ltmain.sh). Another support script, install-sh, is
copyright by M.I.T. but is also freely distributable.
It appears that the arithmetic coding option of the JPEG spec is covered
by patents owned by IBM, AT&T, and Mitsubishi. Hence arithmetic
coding cannot legally be used without obtaining one or more licenses.
For this reason, support for arithmetic coding has been removed from
the free JPEG software. (Since arithmetic coding provides only a
marginal gain over the unpatented Huffman mode, it is unlikely that very
many implementations will support it.) So far as we are aware, there are
no patent restrictions on the remaining code.
The IJG distribution formerly included code to read and write GIF files. To
avoid entanglement with the Unisys LZW patent, GIF reading support
has been removed altogether, and the GIF writer has been simplified to
produce “uncompressed GIFs”. This technique does not use the LZW
algorithm; the resulting GIF files are larger than usual, but are readable by
all standard GIF decoders.
We are required to state that
“The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright property of
CompuServe Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a Service Mark property of
CompuServe Incorporated.”
GLUT for Win32 License
The OpenGL Utility Toolkit distribution for Win32 (Windows NT &
Windows 95) contains source code modified from the original source
code for GLUT version 3.3 which was developed by Mark J. Kilgard. The
original source code for GLUT is Copyright 1997 by Mark J. Kilgard.
GLUT for Win32 is Copyright 1997 by Nate Robins and is not in the
public domain, but it is freely distributable without licensing fees.
It is provided without guarantee or warrantee expressed or implied.
It was ported with the permission of Mark J. Kilgard by Nate Robins.
THIS SOURCE CODE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
OpenGL (R) is a registered trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc.
CodeIgniter License Agreement
Copyright (c) 2008 - 2009, EllisLab, Inc.
All rights reserved.
This license is a legal agreement between you and EllisLab Inc. for the
use of CodeIgniter Software (the “Software”). By obtaining the Software
you agree to comply with the terms and conditions of this license.
Permitted Use
You are permitted to use, copy, modify, and distribute the Software and
its documentation, with or without modification, for any purpose,
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. A copy of this license agreement must be included with the
distribution.
2. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice
in all source code files.
3. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
4. Any files that have been modified must carry notices stating the nature
of the change and the names of those who changed them.
5. Products derived from the Software must include an acknowledgment
that they are derived from CodeIgniter in their documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
6. Products derived from the Software may not be called “CodeIgniter”,
nor may “CodeIgniter” appear in their name, without prior written
permission from EllisLab, Inc.
Indemnity
You agree to indemnify and hold harmless the authors of the Software
and any contributors for any direct, indirect, incidental, or consequential
third-party claims, actions or suits, as well as any related expenses,
liabilities, damages, settlements or fees arising from your use or misuse
of the Software, or a violation of any terms of this license.
Disclaimer of Warranty
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, WARRANTIES OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Limitations of Liability
YOU ASSUME ALL RISK ASSOCIATED WITH THE INSTALLATION AND
USE OF THE SOFTWARE. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR CLAIMS,
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY ARISING FROM, OUT OF, OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE. LICENSE HOLDERS ARE SOLELY
RESPONSIBLE FOR DETERMINING THE APPROPRIATENESS OF USE
AND ASSUME ALL RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH ITS USE, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THE RISKS OF PROGRAM ERRORS, DAMAGE TO
EQUIPMENT, LOSS OF DATA OR SOFTWARE PROGRAMS, OR
UNAVAILABILITY OR INTERRUPTION OF OPERATIONS.
The Code Project Open License (CPOL) 1.02
Preamble
This License governs Your use of the Work. This License is intended to
allow developers to use the Source Code and Executable Files provided
as part of the Work in any application in any form.
The main points subject to the terms of the License are:
• Source Code and Executable Files can be used in commercial
applications;
• Source Code and Executable Files can be redistributed; and
• Source Code can be modified to create derivative works.
• No claim of suitability, guarantee, or any warranty whatsoever is
provided. The software is provided “as-is”.
• The Article accompanying the Work may not be distributed or
republished without the Author’s consent
This License is entered between You, the individual or other entity
reading or otherwise making use of the Work licensed pursuant to this
License and the individual or other entity which offers the Work under the
terms of this License (“Author”).
License
THE WORK (AS DEFINED BELOW) IS PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS
OF THIS CODE PROJECT OPEN LICENSE (“LICENSE”). THE WORK IS
PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT AND/OR OTHER APPLICABLE LAW.
ANY USE OF THE WORK OTHER THAN AS AUTHORIZED UNDER
THIS LICENSE OR COPYRIGHT LAW IS PROHIBITED.
BY EXERCISING ANY RIGHTS TO THE WORK PROVIDED HEREIN,
YOU ACCEPT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS
LICENSE. THE AUTHOR GRANTS YOU THE RIGHTS CONTAINED
HEREIN IN CONSIDERATION OF YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF SUCH
TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ACCEPT AND
BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE, YOU CANNOT MAKE
ANY USE OF THE WORK.
1. Definitions.
a.“Articles” means, collectively, all articles written by Author which
describes how the Source Code and Executable Files for the Work
may be used by a user.
b.“Author” means the individual or entity that offers the Work under
the terms of this License.
c.“Derivative Work” means a work based upon the Work or upon
the Work and other pre-existing works.
d.“Executable Files” refer to the executables, binary files,
configuration and any required data files included in the Work.
e.“Publisher” means the provider of the website, magazine, CD-ROM,
DVD or other medium from or by which the Work is obtained by You.
f. “Source Code” refers to the collection of source code and
configuration files used to create the Executable Files.
g.“Standard Version” refers to such a Work if it has not been
modified, or has been modified in accordance with the consent of the
Author, such consent being in the full discretion of the Author.
h.“Work” refers to the collection of files distributed by the Publisher,
including the Source Code, Executable Files, binaries, data files,
documentation, whitepapers and the Articles.
i. “You” is you, an individual or entity wishing to use the Work and
exercise your rights under this License.
2. Fair Use/Fair Use Rights. Nothing in this License is intended to
reduce, limit, or restrict any rights arising from fair use, fair dealing, first
sale or other limitations on the exclusive rights of the copyright owner
under copyright law or other applicable laws.
3. License Grant. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License,
the Author hereby grants You a worldwide, royalty-free, non-exclusive,
perpetual (for the duration of the applicable copyright) license to exercise
the rights in the Work as stated below:
a.You may use the standard version of the Source Code or
Executable Files in Your own applications.
b.You may apply bug fixes, portability fixes and other modifications
obtained from the Public Domain or from the Author. A Work modified
in such a way shall still be considered the standard version and will be
subject to this License.
c.You may otherwise modify Your copy of this Work (excluding the
Articles) in any way to create a Derivative Work, provided that You
insert a prominent notice in each changed file stating how, when and
where You changed that file.
d.You may distribute the standard version of the Executable Files and
Source Code or Derivative Work in aggregate with other (possibly
commercial) programs as part of a larger (possibly commercial)
software distribution.
e.The Articles discussing the Work published in any form by the
author may not be distributed or republished without the Author’s
consent. The author retains copyright to any such Articles. You may
use the Executable Files and Source Code pursuant to this License
but you may not repost or republish or otherwise distribute or make
available the Articles, without the prior written consent of the Author.
Any subroutines or modules supplied by You and linked into the Source
Code or Executable Files this Work shall not be considered part of this
Work and will not be subject to the terms of this License.
4. Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License,
each Author hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive,
no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section)
patent license to make, have made, use, import, and otherwise transfer
the Work.
5. Restrictions. The license granted in Section 3 above is expressly
made subject to and limited by the following restrictions:
a.You agree not to remove any of the original copyright, patent,
trademark, and attribution notices and associated disclaimers that
may appear in the Source Code or Executable Files.
b.You agree not to advertise or in any way imply that this Work is a
product of Your own.
c.The name of the Author may not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from the Work without the prior written consent of
the Author.
d.You agree not to sell, lease, or rent any part of the Work. This does
not restrict you from including the Work or any part of the Work inside
a larger software distribution that itself is being sold. The Work by
itself, though, cannot be sold, leased or rented.
e.You may distribute the Executable Files and Source Code only
under the terms of this License, and You must include a copy of, or
the Uniform Resource Identifier for, this License with every copy of the
Executable Files or Source Code You distribute and ensure that
anyone receiving such Executable Files and Source Code agrees that
the terms of this License apply to such Executable Files and/or Source
Code. You may not offer or impose any terms on the Work that alter or
restrict the terms of this License or the recipients’ exercise of the rights
granted hereunder. You may not sublicense the Work. You must keep
intact all notices that refer to this License and to the disclaimer of
warranties. You may not distribute the Executable Files or Source
Code with any technological measures that control access or use of
the Work in a manner inconsistent with the terms of this License.
f. You agree not to use the Work for illegal, immoral or improper
purposes, or on pages containing illegal, immoral or improper material.
The Work is subject to applicable export laws. You agree to comply
with all such laws and regulations that may apply to the Work after
Your receipt of the Work.
6. Representations, Warranties and Disclaimer. THIS WORK IS
PROVIDED “AS IS”, “WHERE IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITHOUT ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OR GUARANTEES.
YOU, THE USER, ASSUME ALL RISK IN ITS USE, INCLUDING COPYRIGHT
INFRINGEMENT, PATENT INFRINGEMENT, SUITABILITY, ETC. AUTHOR
EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION,
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, MERCHANTABLE
QUALITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR ANY
WARRANTY OF TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, OR THAT THE WORK
(OR ANY PORTION THEREOF) IS CORRECT, USEFUL, BUG-FREE OR
FREE OF VIRUSES. YOU MUST PASS THIS DISCLAIMER ON WHENEVER
YOU DISTRIBUTE THE WORK OR DERIVATIVE WORKS.
7. Indemnity. You agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the
Author and the Publisher from and against any claims, suits, losses,
damages, liabilities, costs, and expenses (including reasonable legal or
attorneys’ fees) resulting from or relating to any use of the Work by You.
8. Limitation on Liability. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT REQUIRED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL THE AUTHOR OR THE
PUBLISHER BE LIABLE TO YOU ON ANY LEGAL THEORY FOR ANY
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS LICENSE OR THE USE OF THE
WORK OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF THE AUTHOR OR THE PUBLISHER
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
9. Termination.
a.This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate
automatically upon any breach by You of any term of this License.
Individuals or entities who have received Derivative Works from You
under this License, however, will not have their licenses terminated
provided such individuals or entities remain in full compliance with
those licenses. Sections 1, 2, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 and 11 will survive any
termination of this License.
b.If You bring a copyright, trademark, patent or any other infringement
claim against any contributor over infringements You claim are made
by the Work, your License from such contributor to the Work ends
automatically.
c.Subject to the above terms and conditions, this License is perpetual
(for the duration of the applicable copyright in the Work).
Notwithstanding the above, the Author reserves the right to release
the Work under different license terms or to stop distributing the Work
at any time; provided, however that any such election will not serve to
withdraw this License (or any other license that has been, or is
required to be, granted under the terms of this License), and this
License will continue in full force and effect unless terminated as stated
above.
10. Publisher. The parties hereby confirm that the Publisher shall not,
under any circumstances, be responsible for and shall not have any
liability in respect of the subject matter of this License. The Publisher
makes no warranty whatsoever in connection with the Work and shall
not be liable to You or any party on any legal theory for any damages
whatsoever, including without limitation any general, special, incidental or
consequential damages arising in connection to this license. The
Publisher reserves the right to cease making the Work available to You at
any time without notice
11. Miscellaneous
a.This License shall be governed by the laws of the location of the
head office of the Author or if the Author is an individual, the laws of
location of the principal place of residence of the Author.
b.If any provision of this License is invalid or unenforceable under
applicable law, it shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the
remainder of the terms of this License, and without further action by
the parties to this License, such provision shall be reformed to the
minimum extent necessary to make such provision valid and
enforceable.
c.No term or provision of this License shall be deemed waived and no
breach consented to unless such waiver or consent shall be in writing
and signed by the party to be charged with such waiver or consent.
d.This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties
with respect to the Work licensed herein. There are no understandings,
agreements or representations with respect to the Work not specified
herein. The Author shall not be bound by any additional provisions that
may appear in any communication from You. This License may not be
modified without the mutual written agreement of the Author and You.
BSD 3-clause License
Copyright (c) 2002-2008, Milan Ikits
Copyright (c) 2002-2008, Marcelo E. Magallon
Copyright (c) 2002, Lev Povalahev
Copyright (c) Alexandru Marasteanu
Copyright (c) 2005-2007 Paul Hsieh
Copyright (c) 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc
Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd
Copyright (c) 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc
Copyright (c) 2003-2012, Sparta, Inc
Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network Center of Beijing
University of Posts and Telecommunications
Copyright (c) 2003, Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG
Copyright (c) 2007 Apple Inc.
Copyright (c) 2009, ScienceLogic, LLC
Copyright (c) 2006 Alexander Chemeris
Copyright (c) 2004, Jan Kneschke, incremental
Copyright (c) 2009-2012 D. R. Commander
Copyright (c) 2003-2005 Tom Wuz
Copyright (c) 2000-2009 Paul Johnston
contributors: Greg Holt, Andrew Kepert, Ydnar, Lostinet
Copyright (c) 2008-2009 Alex Weber
Copyright (c) 2005-2009, Thomas BERNARD
Copyright (c) <YEAR>, <OWNER>
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
• Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
• Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
• Neither the name of the <ORGANIZATION> nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
BSD Two Clause License
Copyright (c) <YEAR>, <OWNER>
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND
DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
“License” shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and
distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
“Licensor” shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the
copyright owner that is granting the License.
“Legal Entity” shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other
entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with
that entity. For the purposes of this definition, “control” means (i) the
power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such
entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent
(50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of
such entity.
“You” (or “Your”) shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising
permissions granted by this License.
“Source” form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications,
including but not limited to software source code, documentation source,
and configuration files.
“Object” form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical
transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to
compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to
other media types.
“Work” shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object
form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright
notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided
in the Appendix below).
“Derivative Works” shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object
form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the
editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications
represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes
of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain
separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the
Work and Derivative Works thereof.
“Contribution” shall mean any work of authorship, including the original
version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or
Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for
inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal
Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the
purposes of this definition, “submitted” means any form of electronic,
verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its
representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic
mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems
that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of
discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is
conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the
copyright owner as “Not a Contribution.”
“Contributor” shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on
behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and
subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright
license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display,
publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative
Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this
License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide,
non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in
this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell,
import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only
to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily
infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their
Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was
submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a
cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a
Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or
contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You
under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such
litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work
or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications,
and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following
conditions:
a.You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works
a copy of this License; and
b.You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating
that You changed the files; and
c.You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that
You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices
from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not
pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and
d.If the Work includes a “NOTICE” text file as part of its distribution,
then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable
copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file,
excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the
Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a
NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the
Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative
Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and
wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the
NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the
License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative
Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the
NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution
notices cannot be construed as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and
may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use,
reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such
Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and
distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in
this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise,
any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You
to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License,
without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above,
nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate
license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such
Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade
names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor,
except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the
origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed
to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides
its Contributions) on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR
CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without
limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You
are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or
redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your
exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether
in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by
applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed
to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including
any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any
character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to
use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill,
work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other
commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been
advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the
Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a
fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability
obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in
accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on
Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if
You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for
any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by
reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License
to your work
To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following
boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets “[]” replaced with
your own identifying information. (Don’t include the brackets!) The text
should be enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file
format. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of
purpose be included on the same “printed page” as the copyright notice
for easier identification within third-party archives.
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner] Licensed under the Apache
License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not use this file except in
compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 Unless required by
applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the
License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR
CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License
for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the
License.
ISC License
Copyright (c) 2004-2013 by Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. (“ISC”)
Copyright (c) 1995-2003 by Internet Software Consortium
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER
RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN
AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS
ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Internet Systems Consortium, Inc.
950 Charter Street
Redwood City, CA 94063
<info@isc.org>
https://www.isc.org/
Internet Society RFC License
Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2002). All Rights Reserved.
This document and translations of it may be copied and furnished to
others, and derivative works that comment on or otherwise explain it or
assist in its implementation may be prepared, copied, published and
distributed, in whole or in part, without restriction of any kind, provided that
the above copyright notice and this paragraph are included on all such
copies and derivative works. However, this document itself may not be
modified in any way, such as by removing the copyright notice or
references to the Internet Society or other Internet organizations, except as
needed for the purpose of developing Internet standards in which case the
procedures for copyrights defined in the Internet Standards process must
be followed, or as required to translate it into languages other than English.
The limited permissions granted above are perpetual and will not be
revoked by the Internet Society or its successors or assigns.
This document and the information contained herein is provided on an
“AS IS” basis and THE INTERNET SOCIETY AND THE INTERNET
ENGINEERING TASK FORCE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY
WARRANTY THAT THE USE OF THE INFORMATION HEREIN WILL
NOT INFRINGE ANY RIGHTS OR ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Acknowledgement
Funding for the RFC Editor function is currently provided by the Internet
Society.
Brian Gladman Alternate License
Copyright (c) 1998-2006, Brian Gladman, Worcester, UK. All rights
reserved.
LICENSE TERMS
The free distribution and use of this software in both source and binary
form is allowed (with or without changes) provided that:
1. distributions of this source code include the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer;
2. distributions in binary form include the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other associated materials;
3. the copyright holder’s name is not used to endorse products built
using this software without specific written permission.
ALTERNATIVELY, provided that this notice is retained in full, this product
may be distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public License
(GPL), in which case the provisions of the GPL apply INSTEAD OF those
given above.
DISCLAIMER
This software is provided ‘as is’ with no explicit or implied warranties in
respect of its properties, including, but not limited to, correctness and/or
fitness for purpose.
Boost Software License - Version 1.0
August 17th, 2003
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person or
organization obtaining a copy of the software and accompanying
documentation covered by this license (the “Software”) to use,
reproduce, display, distribute, execute, and transmit the Software, and to
prepare derivative works of the Software, and to permit third-parties to
whom the Software is furnished to do so, all subject to the following:
The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement, including
the above license grant, this restriction and the following disclaimer, must
be included in all copies of the Software, in whole or in part, and all
derivative works of the Software, unless such copies or derivative works
are solely in the form of machine-executable object code generated by a
source language processor.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE DISTRIBUTING THE
SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Curl License
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2003, Daniel Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>.
All rights reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
purposewith or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USEOR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall
not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the
copyright holder.
libxml2 License
Except where otherwise noted in the source code (e.g. the files hash.c,
list.c and the trio files, which are covered by a similar licence but with
different Copyright notices) all the files are:
Copyright (C) 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
“Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE DANIEL VEILLARD BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of Daniel Veillard shall not
be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from him.
NTP License
This file is automatically generated from html/copyright.htm
Copyright Notice
[sheepb.jpg] “Clone me,” says Dolly sheepishly
______________________________________________________________
The following copyright notice applies to all files collectively called the
Network Time Protocol Version 4 Distribution. Unless specifically
declared otherwise in an individual file, this notice applies as if the text
was explicitly included in the file.
32. [35]Tom Moore <tmoore@fievel.daytonoh.ncr.com> i386 svr4 port
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that
both the copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation, and that the name University of Delaware not
be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
software without specific, written prior permission. The University of
Delaware makes no representations about the suitability this software for
any purpose. It is provided “as is” without express or implied warranty.
35. [39]Rainer Pruy <Rainer.Pruy@informatik.uni-erlangen.de>
monitoring/trap scripts, statistics file handling
Copyright (c) David L. Mills 1992-2001
The following individuals contributed in part to the Network Time Protocol
Distribution Version 4 and are acknowledged as authors of this work.
1. [1]Mark Andrews <marka@syd.dms.csiro.au> Leitch atomic clock
controller
2. [2]Bernd Altmeier <altmeier@atlsoft.de> hopf Elektronik serial line and
PCI-bus devices
3. [3]Viraj Bais <vbais@mailman1.intel.com> and [4]Clayton Kirkwood
<kirkwood@striderfm.intel.com> port to WindowsNT 3.5
4. [5]Michael Barone <michael,barone@lmco.com> GPSVME fixes
5. [6]Karl Berry <karl@owl.HQ.ileaf.com> syslog to file option
6. [7]Greg Brackley <greg.brackley@bigfoot.com> Major rework of
WINNT port. Clean up recvbuf and iosignal code into separate modules.
7. [8]Marc Brett <Marc.Brett@westgeo.com> Magnavox GPS clock
driver
8. [9]Piete Brooks <Piete.Brooks@cl.cam.ac.uk> MSF clock driver,
Trimble PARSE support
9. [10]Reg Clemens <reg@dwf.com> Oncore driver (Current maintainer)
10. [11]Steve Clift <clift@ml.csiro.au> OMEGA clock driver
11. [12]Casey Crellin <casey@csc.co.za> vxWorks (Tornado) port and
help with target configuration
12. [13]Sven Dietrich <sven_dietrich@trimble.com> Palisade reference
clock driver, NT adj. residuals, integrated Greg’s Winnt port.
13. [14]John A. Dundas III <dundas@salt.jpl.nasa.gov> Apple A/UX port
14. [15]Torsten Duwe <duwe@immd4.informatik.uni-erlangen.de> Linux
port
15. [16]Dennis Ferguson <dennis@mrbill.canet.ca> foundation code for
NTP Version 2 as specified in RFC-1119
16. [17]Glenn Hollinger <glenn@herald.usask.ca> GOES clock driver
17. [18]Mike Iglesias <iglesias@uci.edu> DEC Alpha port
18. [19]Jim Jagielski <jim@jagubox.gsfc.nasa.gov> A/UX port
19. [20]Jeff Johnson <jbj@chatham.usdesign.com> massive prototyping
overhaul
20. [21]Hans Lambermont <Hans.Lambermont@nl.origin-it.com> or
[22]<H.Lambermont@chello.nl> ntpsweep
33. [36]Kamal A Mostafa <kamal@whence.com> SCO OpenServer port
34. [37]Derek Mulcahy <derek@toybox.demon.co.uk> and [38]Damon
Hart-Davis <d@hd.org> ARCRON MSF clock driver
36. [40]Dirce Richards <dirce@zk3.dec.com> Digital UNIX V4.0 port
37. [41]Wilfredo Sánchez <wsanchez@apple.com> added support for
NetInfo
38. [42]Nick Sayer <mrapple@quack.kfu.com> SunOS streams modules
39. [43]Jack Sasportas <jack@innovativeinternet.com> Saved a Lot of
space on the stuff in the html/pic/ subdirectory
40. [44]Ray Schnitzler <schnitz@unipress.com> Unixware1 port
41. [45]Michael Shields <shields@tembel.org> USNO clock driver
42. [46]Jeff Steinman <jss@pebbles.jpl.nasa.gov> Datum PTS clock
driver
43. [47]Harlan Stenn <harlan@pfcs.com> GNU automake/autoconfigure
makeover, various other bits (see the ChangeLog)
44. [48]Kenneth Stone <ken@sdd.hp.com> HP-UX port
45. [49]Ajit Thyagarajan <ajit@ee.udel.edu>IP multicast/anycast support
46. [50]Tomoaki TSURUOKA <tsuruoka@nc.fukuoka-u.ac.jp>TRAK
clock driver
47. [51]Paul A Vixie <vixie@vix.com> TrueTime GPS driver, generic
TrueTime clock driver
48. [52]Ulrich Windl <Ulrich.Windl@rz.uni-regensburg.de> corrected and
validated HTML documents according to the HTML DTD
______________________________________________________________
[53]gif
[54]David L. Mills <mills@udel.edu>
References
1. mailto:marka@syd.dms.csiro.au
2. mailto:altmeier@atlsoft.de
3. mailto:vbais@mailman1.intel.co
4. mailto:kirkwood@striderfm.intel.com
5. mailto:michael.barone@lmco.com
6. mailto:karl@owl.HQ.ileaf.com
7. mailto:greg.brackley@bigfoot.com
8. mailto:Marc.Brett@westgeo.com
9. mailto:Piete.Brooks@cl.cam.ac.uk
10. mailto:reg@dwf.com
11. mailto:clift@ml.csiro.au
12. mailto:casey@csc.co.za
21. [23]Poul-Henning Kamp <phk@FreeBSD.ORG> Oncore driver
(Original author)
13. mailto:Sven_Dietrich@trimble.COM
PARSE <GENERIC> driver (14 reference clocks), STREAMS modules for
PARSE, support scripts, syslog cleanup
16. mailto:dennis@mrbill.canet.ca
22. [24]Frank Kardel [25]<Frank.Kardel@informatik.uni-erlangen.de>
23. [26]William L. Jones <jones@hermes.chpc.utexas.edu> RS/6000 AIX
modifications, HPUX modifications
24. [27]Dave Katz <dkatz@cisco.com> RS/6000 AIX port
25. [28]Craig Leres <leres@ee.lbl.gov> 4.4BSD port, ppsclock,
Magnavox GPS clock driver
26. [29]George Lindholm <lindholm@ucs.ubc.ca> SunOS 5.1 port
27. [30]Louis A. Mamakos <louie@ni.umd.edu> MD5-based
authentication
28. [31]Lars H. Mathiesen <thorinn@diku.dk> adaptation of foundation
code for Version 3 as specified in RFC-1305
29. [32]David L. Mills <mills@udel.edu> Version 4 foundation: clock
discipline, authentication, precision kernel; clock drivers: Spectracom,
Austron, Arbiter, Heath, ATOM, ACTS, KSI/Odetics; audio clock drivers:
CHU, WWV/H, IRIG
30. [33]Wolfgang Moeller <moeller@gwdgv1.dnet.gwdg.de> VMS port
31. [34]Jeffrey Mogul <mogul@pa.dec.com> ntptrace utility
14. mailto:dundas@salt.jpl.nasa.gov
15. mailto:duwe@immd4.informatik.uni-erlangen.de
17. mailto:glenn@herald.usask.ca
18. mailto:iglesias@uci.edu
19. mailto:jagubox.gsfc.nasa.gov
20. mailto:jbj@chatham.usdesign.com
21. mailto:Hans.Lambermont@nl.origin-it.comv
22. mailto:H.Lambermont@chello.nl
23. mailto:phk@FreeBSD.ORG
24. http://www4.informatik.uni-erlangen.de/˜kardel
25. mailto:Frank.Kardel@informatik.uni-erlangen.de
26. mailto:jones@hermes.chpc.utexas.edu
27. mailto:dkatz@cisco.com
28. mailto:leres@ee.lbl.gov
29. mailto:lindholm@ucs.ubc.ca
30. mailto:louie@ni.umd.edu
31. mailto:thorinn@diku.dk
32. mailto:mills@udel.edu
33. mailto:moeller@gwdgv1.dnet.gwdg.de
34. mailto:mogul@pa.dec.com
35. mailto:tmoore@fievel.daytonoh.ncr.com
36. mailto:kamal@whence.com
37. mailto:derek@toybox.demon.co.uk
38. mailto:d@hd.org
39. mailto:Rainer.Pruy@informatik.uni-erlangen.de
40. mailto:dirce@zk3.dec.com
41. mailto:wsanchez@apple.com
42. mailto:mrapple@quack.kfu.com
43. mailto:jack@innovativeinternet.com
44. mailto:schnitz@unipress.com
45. mailto:shields@tembel.org
46. mailto:pebbles.jpl.nasa.gov
47. mailto:harlan@pfcs.com
48. mailto:ken@sdd.hp.com
49. mailto:ajit@ee.udel.edu
50. mailto:tsuruoka@nc.fukuoka-u.ac.jp
51. mailto:vixie@vix.com
52. mailto:Ulrich.Windl@rz.uni-regensburg.de
53. file://localhost/backroom/ntp-stable/html/index.htm
54. mailto:mills@udel.edu
PCRE 5 LICENCE
------------
PCRE is a library of functions to support regular expressions whose
syntax and semantics are as close as possible to those of the Perl 5
language.
Release 5 of PCRE is distributed under the terms of the “BSD” licence,
as specified below. The documentation for PCRE, supplied in the “doc”
directory, is distributed under the same terms as the software itself.
Written by: Philip Hazel {ph10@cam.ac.uk}
University of Cambridge Computing Service,
Cambridge, England. Phone: +44 1223 334714.
Copyright (c) 1997-2004 University of Cambridge
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
• Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
• Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
• Neither the name of the University of Cambridge nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
End
Samsung Techwin cares for the environment at all product manufacturing stages, and is taking measures to provide
customers with more environmentally friendly products.
The Eco mark represents Samsung Techwin's devotion to creating environmentally friendly products, and indicates
that the product satisfies the EU RoHS Directive.
Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems)
This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB
cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment
or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly
to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources.
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of
where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling.
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic
accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal.
Correct disposal of batteries in this product
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems.)
This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their
working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive
2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment.
To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery
return system.
SALES NETWORK
SAMSUNG TECHWIN CO., LTD.
6, Pangyo-ro 319beon-gil, Bundang-gu, Seongnam-si, Gyeonggi-do, SEOUL 463-400 Rep. of KOREA
Tel : +82-70-7147-8753, 8764 Fax : +82-31-8018-3740
www.samsungsecurity.com
SAMSUNG TECHWIN AMERICA Inc.
100 Challenger Rd. Suite 700 Ridgefield Park, NJ 07660
Toll Free : +1-877-213-1222 Direct : +1-201-325-6920
Fax : +1-201-373-0124
www.samsung-security.com
www.samsungtechwin.com
www.samsungsecurity.com
www.samsungipolis.com
SAMSUNG TECHWIN EUROPE LTD.
2nd Floor, No. 5 The Heights, Brooklands, Weybridge, Surrey,
KT13 0NY, UK
Tel : +44-1932-82-6700 Fax : +44-1932-82-6701
www.samsungsecurity.co.uk